N. Energy Usage Intensity (EUI): is a relative measure of a building’s operational energy use per unit of floor area, which is commonly expressed as either kilo-BTU per square foot per year (kBtu/ft2) or kilowatt-hour per square meter per year (kWh/m2).
O. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD): An EPD is an independently verified report based on life-cycle assessment studies that have been conducted according to a set of common rules for each product category and then peer-reviewed. EPDs can be either industry wide (Generic) or Product Specific:
1. Product-Specific Declaration: A product with a publicly available, critically reviewed lifecycle assessment conforming to ISO 14044 that has at least a cradle to gate scope.
2. An Industry-wide Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) is a product with a third-party certification, including external verification, in which the manufacturer is explicated recognized by the program operator. The industry-wide Environmental Product Declaration shall conform to ISO 14025 and 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope. Also referred to as a “generic” Environmental Product Declaration.
3. Product-specific Type III EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external verification and external critical review in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as the participant by the program operator are valued as 1.5 products for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 180
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 8113 - 3
P. Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR): Products whose manufacturer has established measures to reclaim its products at the end of their useful life and to recycle them into the same product.
1. Producers must recover and recycle the materials for use in new products of the same type.
2. EPR programs as also known as "closed-loop" or "product take-back".
Q. Global Warming Potential: Global warming potential is a measure of how much heat a greenhouse gas traps in the atmosphere up to a specific time horizon, relative to carbon dioxide.
R. Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Protocol: establishes comprehensive global standardized frameworks to measure and manage greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions from private and public sector operations, value chains and mitigation actions.
S. GreenScreen® for Safer Chemicals: A method for comparative chemical hazard assessment and their potential effect on human health and the environment.
T. Green Stormwater Infrastructure: Infrastructure designed to filter and absorb stormwater where it falls.
U. Grey Water: Wastewater that has been used for washing, laundering, bathing, or showering.
V. Health Product Declaration: A standard format for reporting product content and associated health information for building products and materials.
W. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan: Plan developed by the contractor to provide a healthy and safe indoor environment for workers during construction as well as the building’s current and eventual occupants. The IAQ Management Plan shall meet or exceed the recommendations of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007 (ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008), Chapter 3.
X. Inherently nonemitting sources: Products that are inherently nonemitting sources of VOCs (stone, ceramic, powder-coated metals, plated or anodized metal, glass, concrete, clay brick, and unfinished or untreated solid wood) are considered fully compliant without any VOC emissions testing if they do not include integral organic-based surface coatings, binders, or sealants.
Y. Inside the Building: Defined as inside the weatherproofing system.
Z. International Living Future Institute (ILFI): A non-profit group of leaders from every sector of the building industry working to promote buildings that are environmentally responsible, profitable and healthy places to live and work. The ILFI is administrator of the Living Building Challenge (LBC) Certification.
AA. International Well Building Institute (IWBI): A non-profit group of leaders from every sector of the building industry working to promote buildings that are environmentally responsible, profitable and healthy places to live and work. The IWBI is administrator of the WELL Building Certification.
BB. Leadership Extraction Practices: Products that meet at least one of the responsible extraction criteria, which include: extended producer responsibility; bio-based materials; FSC wood products; materials reuse; recycled content; and other USGBC approved programs.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 181
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 8113 - 4
CC. Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design (LEED): A green building rating system that provides independent third party verification of a project’s sustainability.
DD. LEED: USGBC's "LEED Version 4 for Building Design and Construction.”
1. Definitions that are a part of "LEED v4 for Building Design and Construction" (LEED v4 BD+C) apply to this Section.
EE. Life Cycle Assessment (LCA): An evaluation of the environmental effects of a product from cradle to grave, as defined by ISO 14040-2006 and ISO 14044-2006.
FF. Light Reflectance Value: a measure of visible and usable light that is reflected from a surface when illuminated by a light source.
GG. Low-Emitting Materials Requirements: As defined in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Requirements”
HH. Material Cost: The dollar value of materials being provided to the site, after any contractor markups, inclusive of all transportation and tax fees but excluding equipment and labor costs.
II. Material Transparency: refers to the practice by manufacturers of disclosing the environmental and health impacts of products.
JJ. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV): Unit of measurement used to report a filter’s ability to capture larger particulates between 0.3 and 10 microns (μg).
KK. Multi-Attribute Standard. Sustainable Certification standard that shows impact reduction in several sustainability categories, often including environmental, health, and social. MultiAttribute Optimization: Third party certified products that demonstrate impact reduction below industry average in at least three of the following six categories: global warming potential; stratospheric ozone depletion; acidification; eutrophication; tropospheric ozone creation; nonrenewable resource depletion.
LL. Multi-Attribute Optimization: Third party certified products that demonstrate impact reduction below industry average in at least three of the following six categories: global warming potential; stratospheric ozone depletion; acidification; eutrophication; tropospheric ozone creation; nonrenewable resource depletion.
MM. Net Zero Carbon: refers to the balance between the amount of greenhouse gas produced and the amount removed from the atmosphere. We reach net zero when the amount we add is no more than the amount taken away.
NN. Operational Carbon: as defined by Zero Carbon Standard 1.0, International Living Future Institute, is the Greenhouse Gas emissions associated with the operational energy use of a building. This includes all carbon from energy required to heat and power the building, including but not limited to, lighting, plug loads, heating, cooling, and cooking.
OO. Operational Waste: The waste generated during the operational phase of a building including paper, metal, plastics, confidential waste, and food.
PP. Parts per Billion (ppb) or Micrograms per Liter (μg/L): Unit of measurement, in this case, utilized to measure pollutant.
QQ. Parts per Million (ppm) or Milligrams per Liter (mg/L): Unit of measurement, in this case, utilized to measure pollutant
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 182
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 8113 - 5
RR. Passive (As Related to MEP): Not part of the active portions of the Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing systems, for example piping, pipe insulation, ducts, duct insulation, conduit, plumbing fixtures, faucets, showerheads, and lamp housings.Product Category Rules: A set of rules, requirements, and guidelines for developing Environmental Product Declarations.
SS. Product Category Rules: A set of rules, requirements, and guidelines for developing Environmental Product Declarations.
TT. Program Operator: An organization that ensures EPDs meet the product category rules (PCRs) for the associated product category. The program operator doesn’t do the actual life-cycle assessments. UL Environment is the leading program operator in the United States.
UU. Rain Water: Precipitation on roof structures.
VV. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be determined by weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to determine the recycled content value.
1. "Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose.
2. "Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.
3. Spills and scraps from the original manufacturing process that are combined with other constituents after a minimal amount of reprocessing for use in further production of the same product are not recycled materials.
4. Discarded materials from one manufacturing process that are used as constituents in another manufacturing process are pre-consumer recycled materials.
5. Recycled content of materials shall be defined in accordance with the International Organization for Standardization document, ISO 14021-1999 – Environmental labels and declarations – self declared environmental claims (Type II environmental labeling). www.iso.org
WW. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 100 miles of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.
XX. Resource Positive: is defined as the practice of storing more carbon than the company emits, eliminating waste and providing cleaner freshwater than the company uses. Amazon buildings will be designed to be resilient to future climate impacts and be positive contributors to the local environment by including advanced water and waste strategies, leverage green infrastructure for stormwater management, and design and operate exterior environments to enhance local ecosystems.
YY. Reused Materials: Reclaimed or salvaged equipment or materials previously used in this or other construction, which extends the lifetime of materials that would be otherwise be discarded.
ZZ. Source Location: Location of harvest, extraction, recovery, or manufacture; where information about source location is required to be submitted, give the postal address:
1. In every case, indicate the location of final assembly.
2. For harvested products, indicate location of harvest.
3. For extracted (i.e. mined) products, indicate location of extraction.
4. For recovered products, indicate location of recovery.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 183
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 8113 - 6
5. For products involving multiple manufacturing steps, provide a description of the process at each step, with location.
6. Acceptable Evidence:
a. Manufacturer’s certification.
b. Life cycle analysis (LCA) performed by third-party.
AAA. Stormwater: Rainwater or melted snow that runs off streets, lawns and other sites. When stormwater is absorbed into soil, it is filtered and ultimately replenishes aquifers or flows into streams and rivers.
BBB. Sustainably Harvested Wood: Solid wood, wood chips, and wood fiber certified and labeled by The Forest Stewardship Council as FSC 100%, FSC Mixed, or FSC Recycled.
1. FSC 100%: Label indicating that the wood within the product comes entirely from FSCcertified, well-managed forests.
2. FSC Recycled: Label indicating that the wood or paper in the product comes from reclaimed or re-used material.
3. FSC Mix: Label indicating that the wood within the product is from FSC-certified forests, recycled material, or controlled wood. While not FSC-certified, controlled wood cannot be illegally harvested, harvested in violation of traditional and civil rights, harvested in forests where high conservation values are threatened, harvested in forests being converted to plantations or non-forest use, or harvested in forests where genetically modified trees are planted.
CCC. United States Green Building Council (USGBC): A non-profit group of leaders from every sector of the building industry working to promote buildings that are environmentally responsible, profitable and healthy places to live and work. The USGBC is administrator of the LEED Green Building Rating Systems.
DDD. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC): Carbon compounds considered indoor air contaminants that are odorous, irritating, and/or harmful to the comfort and wellbeing of installers and occupants.
EEE. Wet Applied Products: Materials and products installed in wet form that have South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) rules relating to VOC associated with them. These include the following:
1. SCAQMD Rule 1113: Architectural Coatings
2. SCAQMD Rule 1168: Adhesive and Sealant Applications
1.4 PROJECT GOALS
A. The proposed project is designed to be sustainable, with the intent of incorporating the following qualities:
1. The project will minimize its effect on the environment by selecting environmentally friendly building materials and utilizing sustainable construction practices.
2. The project will provide a healthy and comfortable space for its occupants by developing and following an Indoor Air Quality Management Plan during construction, by selecting only non-toxic and low-emitting materials, and by designing the building’s systems to provide tenants with exceptional indoor air quality.
3. The finished project will consume significantly less energy and water than a typical codecompliant building through the use of premium efficiency equipment and designing efficient building systems.
4. Detailed requirements for addressing specific chemicals of concern are included in Division 2-32 sections that follow. Beyond these material requirements, contractor is encouraged to avoid chemical flame retardants (unless required by code), antimicrobials, and per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances in other building materials.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 184
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 8113 - 7
B. CalGreen requirements:
1. Comply with CALGreen mandatory measures, as well as indoor air quality flush out and testing.
1.5 MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review sustainability requirements and action plans for complying with requirements.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit additional sustainable design submittals required by other Specification Sections.
B. Contractor is responsible for submitting and installing products in accordance with the Sustainable Material Performance requirements outlined as well as:
1. PRODUCT DATA REPORTING FORM Coversheet:
a. Cost of each material or product, excluding labor and equipment b. From manufacturer, for each product‘s environmental attributes. This includes a report describing raw materials suppliers, complete content inventory for the product, and/or environmental product declaration.
c. Highlight compliance with all requirements for low-emitting materials as noted in Part 2 (Products).
2. Providing and following a Construction Waste Management Plan and ongoing documentation of construction and demolition waste recycling / salvage rates for all categories of waste. See Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal.
3. During construction, meet or exceed all applicable recommended control measures of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter
4. Contractor to maintain Materials Credit Tracking Sheet monitoring the project’s progress regarding Materials and Resources goals. Tracking Sheet to be presented at construction meetings and to provide update on the following:
a. Construction and Demolition Waste Management.
b. Recycled content.
c. Bio-based materials.
5. Contractor to maintain a Low Emitting Materials Tracking Sheet monitoring the project’s progress regarding Indoor Environmental Air Quality. Tracking Sheet to be presented at construction meetings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS
A. Sourcing of Raw Materials - Maximize the permanently installed products which meet one of the disclosure criteria below:
1. Bio-based materials. Bio-based products shall meet the Sustainable Agriculture Network’s Sustainable Agriculture Standard. Bio-based raw materials shall be tested using ASTM Test Method D6866 and be legally harvested, as defined by the exporting
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 185
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 8113 - 8
and receiving country. Exclude hide products, such as leather and other animal skin material.
2. New wood products. Wood products shall be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council or USGBC-approved equivalent.
3. Materials reuse. Reuse includes salvaged, refurbished, or reused products.
4. Recycled content. Recycled content is the sum of postconsumer recycled content plus one-half the pre-consumer recycled content, based on cost.
5. Product data and certification letter from product manufacturers, indicating participation in an extended producer responsibility program and statement of costs.
6. Documentation for regional materials, indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material and costs of regional materials.
2.2 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
A. Comply with Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions.”
2.3 INDOOR AIR QUALITY
A. Comply with Section 01 8119 “Construction Indoor Air Quality Management.” PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY POLLUTION PREVENTION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter 3."
1. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during construction period as specified in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls," install filter media having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet for the air-handling system used during construction.
2. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.
3.2 NONSMOKING BUILDING
A. Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 20 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Comply with Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
3.4 ATTACHMENTS
A. PRODUCT DATA REPORTING FORM follows this Section and is available in MS Excel format for Contractor’s use.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 186
PRODUCT DATA REPORTING FORM
THIS FORM IS REQUIRED TO BE SUBMITTED WITH Product Data SubmittalsYou must include backup documentation such as SPECIFIC Product Data Sheets, Cut Sheets, Product Specific Letter from Manufacturer, etc. DO NOT INCLUDE GENERIC MARKETING MATERIAL PROJECT NAME:SUBCONTRACTOR:Specification Section: Submittal Number:
MR EPD
Spec Section/ sProduct Manufacturer
Product Costs1
(only exclude
install labor)
($)
Product Specific (PS) or Industry Wide (IW)
Env. Product
Declaration (EPD)2?
Extended
Producer
Responsibility6
Program Name?
Bio-Based
Materials
FSC Certified3
Wood
Products?
(%)
Material Reuse
Post-Consumer
Recycled
Content4
(%)
Pre-Consumer
Recycled
Content5
(%)
Extracted,
Manufactured,
& Purchased
within7 100
miles?
Manufacturer
Inventory8
Fully Declared
HPD to 1000
ppm
Declaration9
included?
C2C version
(2.1.1 or 3.0)
Level of
Certification 10
Delclare Label11
with ingredient
disclosure greater
than 1000 ppm?
ANSI/BIFMA e3
Furniture
Sustainability
Standard12
Cradle to Cradle
Material Health
Certificate13
Product
Lens14
Facts -
NSF/ANSI
336
CDPH
Emissions16
testing
compliant?
VOC
Content17
(g/L)
Wet-Applied
Products Volume
Used
(L)
Wood
Products
are ULEF
or
NAUF18?
Ex. ABC Product ABC. Inc. $ XX,XXX PS / IW Yes / No Yes / No % Yes/No % % Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No ## ## Yes / No 123456789
NOTES / DEFINITIONS:1. Furnish Costs include all expenses to deliver the material to the project site, including taxes, transport, fabrication and profit. Do not include site labor or installation.2. Environmental Product Declarations which conform to ISO 14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 and have at least a cradle to gate scope. https://spot.ulprospector.com/en/na/BuiltEnvironment3. Wood products must be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and must be provide proof of vendor FSC Chain-of-Custody with this Product Data Submittal. http://info.fsc.org/certificate.php4. Post-Consumer Recycled Content: Sourced from recovered Consumer Waste and used as a raw material (e.g. plastic bottles, newspaper, etc).5. Pre-Consumer Recycled Content: Recovered Industrial Materials diverted from municipal solid waste for use in a different mfg. process, prior to use by a consumer. Note: "home scrap" from the original mfg. process that are reused / reprocessed do not qualify.
6. Extended producer responsibility. Products purchased from a manufacturer (producer) that participates in an extended producer responsibility program or is directly responsible for extended producer responsibility. (e.g. Closed Loop or Take Back Program)
7. Within 100 miles distance is defined as travel by air to the project site, not travel distance by road.8. The manufacturer has published complete content inventory for the product following LEED v4 Guidelines.9. The end use product has a published, complete Health Product Declaration with full disclosure of known hazards in compliance with the Health Product Declaration open Standard. http://www.hpd‐collaborative.org/hpd‐public‐repository/
10. The end use product has a published Crade to Cradle product certification at the Bronze level or higher and at least 90% of materials are assessed by weight. http://www.c2ccertified.org/products/registry11. The end us product has a Declare label indicating all ingredients have been disclosed and screened against the red list down to 1000 ppm. https://access.living-future.org/declare-products12. The end us product has documentation from the assessor or scorecard from BIFMA that demonstrates the product earned at least 3 points under 7.5.1.3 Advanced Level in e3-2014 or 3 points under 7.4.1.3 Advanced Level in e3-2012. https://level.ecomedes.com/13. The end use product has a published Crade to Cradle Material Health certification at the Bronze level or higher and at least 90% of materials are assessed by weight. http://www.c2ccertified.org/products/mhcregistry14. the end use product has a published Product Lens certification. https://spot.ulprospector.com/en/na/BuiltEnvironment15. The end us product has a Sustainability Assessment for Commercial Furnishings Fabric at any certification level https://spot.ulprospector.com/en/na/BuiltEnvironment16. TVOC Emissions for Building products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010 http://www.usgbc.org/resources/low‐emitting‐materials‐third‐party‐certification‐table17. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet applicable VOC limits of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural Coatings, or the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective June 3, 2011. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site must meet the applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168, July 1, 2005, A18. Composite Wood Evaluation as defined by the California Air Resources Board (CARB), Airborne Toxic Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products Regulation, must be documented to have low formaldehyde emissions that meet the CARB ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde (NAUF) resins.
I, __________________________________________ a duly authorized representative of_____________________________________________ hereby certify that the material information submitted here is an accurate representation of the material to be provided under our contract.
EMAIL CONTACT FOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE: _____________________________________________ Direct Phone: ____________________SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE: ___________________________________________________ DATE: ________________________ Project Product Data Low-Emitting Materials LEED Credits Some Qualifying VOC Standards (More in Note 16):CDPH Standard Method v1.1FloorScore: Hard Surfaces & Adhesives Green Label Plus: Carpet, Adhesive, Cushion UL Greengaurd Gold: When Meeting CDPH Std. v1.1 Material Ingredient
http://www.distancefromto.net/
Leadership Extraction
Materials and Resources LEED Credits
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 187
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
LOW EMITTING MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS 01 8116 - 1
SECTION 01 8116
LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Requirements for Indoor-Emissions-Restricted products.
2. Requirements for VOC-Content-Restricted products.
3. Certification that non-compliant products are not installed on Project.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 8113: “Sustainable Design Requirements”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Indoor-Emissions-Restricted Products: All products in the following product categories:
1. Interior paints and coatings applied on site.
2. Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site, including flooring adhesives.
3. Flooring.
4. Composite wood.
5. Products making up wall and ceiling assemblies.
6. Interior thermal and acoustical insulation.
7. Free-standing furniture.
8. Exterior applied products (for Healthcare and Schools projects only).
9. Other products when specifically stated in the specifications.
B. VOC-Content-Restricted Products: All products in the following product categories:
1. Interior paints and coatings applied on site.
2. Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site, including flooring adhesives.
3. Wet-applied roofing and waterproofing.
4. Other products when specifically stated in the specifications.
C. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier.
D. Adhesives: All gunnable, trowelable, liquid-applied, and aerosol adhesives; including flooring adhesives, resilient base adhesives, and pipe jointing adhesives.
E. Sealants: All gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers; including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers.
F. Inherently nonemitting sources: Products that are inherently nonemitting sources of VOCs are considered fully compliant without any VOC emissions testing if they do not include integral organic-based surface coatings, binders, or sealants.
1. Stone.
2. Concrete.
3. Clay brick.
4. Metals that are plated, anodized, or powder-coated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 188
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
LOW EMITTING MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS 01 8116 - 2
5. Glass.
6. Ceramics.
7. Solid wood flooring that is unfinished and untreated.
G. Composite Wood: Products composed of wood or plant particles or fibers bonded by a synthetic resin or binder; including the following:
1. Particleboard.
2. Medium-density fiberboard (MDF).
3. Plywood.
4. Oriented-strand board (OSB).
5. Wheatboard.
6. Strawboard.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. General: Comply with the applicable provisions of the referenced standards except as modified by governing codes and the Contract Documents. Where a recommendation or suggestion occurs in the referenced standards, such recommendation or suggestion shall be considered mandatory. In the event of conflict of referenced standards and this specification or within the standards themselves, the more stringent standard or requirement shall govern.
1. Rule 1168 - "Adhesive and Sealant Applications", South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), State of California http://www.aqmd.gov/docs/default-source/rulebook/reg-xi/rule-1168.pdf
2. Rule 1113 - "Architectural Coatings": South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), State of California http://www.aqmd.gov/docs/default-source/rule-book/regxi/r1113.pdf
3. Green Seal Paint Standard GS-11, Green Seal, Inc., Washington, DC. http://www.greenseal.org/Portals/0/Documents/Standards/GS-11/GS-11_Ed3- 2_Paints_Coatings_Stains_and_Sealers.pdf
4. Green Seal Commercial Adhesive Standard GS-36, Green Seal, Inc., Washington, DC http://www.greenseal.org/Portals/0/Documents/Standards/GS-36/GS-36Ed2- 1_Adhesives_for_Commercial_Use%202018.pdf
5. California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007
https://www.arb.ca.gov/coatings/arch/Approved_2007_SCM.pdf
6. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
7. ASTM D3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings.
8. BIFMA e3 - Furniture Sustainability Standard; Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association.
9. BIFMA M7.1 - Standard Test Method for Determining VOC Emissions from Office Furniture Systems, Components, and Seating.
10. CAL (CDPH SM) - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions From Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers.
11. CARB (ATCM) - Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products; California Air Resources Board.
12. CHPS (HPPD) - High Performance Products Database.
13. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Testing Program - Certified Products.
14. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products.
15. UL (GGG) - GREENGUARD Gold Certified Products.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 189
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
LOW EMITTING MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS 01 8116 - 3
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. If the criteria required for LEED suitable VOC content is not met the Contractor shall calculate VOC's using the "VOC budget process" to demonstrate compliance.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project, submit evidence of compliance.
B. Sustainable Design Reporting: Submit evidence of compliance.
C. Installer Certifications Regarding Prohibited Content: Require each installer of any type of product (not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either (1) no adhesives, joint sealants, paints, coatings, or composite wood or agrifiber products have been used in the installation of installer's products, or 2) that such products used comply with these requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. VOC Emissions Evaluation - Standard and Test Method: CAL (CDPH SM), using Standard Private Office exposure scenario and the allowable concentrations specified in the method, and range of total VOC's after 14 days.
1. Wet-Applied Products: State amount applied in mass per surface area.
2. Paints and Coatings: Test tinted products, not just tinting bases.
3. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are the following; a. Current UL (GGG) GREENGUARD Gold certification.
b. Current SCS (CPD) Floorscore certification.
c. Current SCS (CPD) Indoor Advantage Gold certification. d. Current listing in CHPS (HPPD) as a low-emitting product. e. Current CRI (GLP) certification.
f. Test report showing compliance and stating exposure scenario used.
4. Product data submittal showing VOC content is NOT acceptable evidence.
5. Manufacturer's certification without test report by independent agency is NOT acceptable evidence.
B. VOC Content Test Method: 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), or ASTM D3960, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements. c. Certification by manufacturer that product complies with requirements.
C. Composite Wood Emissions Standard: CARB (ATCM) or EPA TSCA VI for ultra-low emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins.
1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:
a. Current SCS "No Added Formaldehyde (NAF)" certification; www.scscertified.com. b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. c. Published product data showing compliance with requirements. d. Wood structural panel manufactured according to PS 1-09 or PS 2-10 (or one of the standards considered by CARB to be equivalent to PS 1 or PS 2) and labeled bond classification Exposure 1 or Exterior
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 190
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
LOW EMITTING MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS 01 8116 - 4
e. Structural wood product manufactured according to ASTM D 5456 (for structural composite lumber), ANSI A190.1 (for glued laminated timber), ASTM D 5055 (for Ijoists), ANSI PRG 320 (for cross-laminated timber), or PS 20-15 (for finger-jointed lumber).
D. Flooring: Flooring shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." E. Ceilings, Walls, and Insulation: Ceilings, walls, and thermal insulation shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
F. Furnishings Emissions Standard and Test Method: BIFMA e3-2014e (updated version) or e3- 2019 (updated version) Sections 7.6.1 and 7.6.2, tested in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA M7.1- 2011 (R2016).
1. Evidence of Compliance:
a. Test report showing compliance and stating exposure scenario used.
2. Any furniture procured as part of this project must meet the Healthier Hospitals Initiative: Healthy Interiors (HHI-Healthy Interiors) standard for 100% of furniture, including being free of chemical flame retardants, unless required by code.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All Products: Comply with the most stringent of federal, State, and local requirements, or these specifications.
B. VOC Emissions Evaluation - Product Requirements:
1. Paints and Coatings: CAL (CDPH SM).
2. Adhesives and Sealants: CAL (CDPH SM).
3. Flooring: CAL (CDPH SM).
4. Insulation: CAL (CDPH SM).
5. Composite Wood, Wood Fiber, and Wood Chip Products: Comply with Composite Wood Emissions Standard or contain no added formaldehyde resins.
6. Furnishings: Comply with Furnishings Emissions Standard and Test Method.
7. Exceptions: Inherently Non-Emitting Materials are not required to have VOC emissions testing.
C. VOC-Content-Restricted Products: VOC content not greater than required by the following:
1. Adhesives, Including Flooring Adhesives: SCAQMD 1168 Rule.
2. Aerosol Adhesives: GreenSeal GS-36.
3. Joint Sealants: SCAQMD 1168 Rule.
4. Paints and Coatings: Each color; most stringent of the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
b. SCAQMD 1113 Rule.
c. CARB (SCM).
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 191
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
LOW EMITTING MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS 01 8116 - 5
5. Wet-Applied Roofing and Waterproofing: Comply with requirements for paints and coatings.
D. Chemical Content: Products shall be free of halogenated and organophosphorous flame retardants, per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances (i.e. stain and water repellants), antimicrobials, and fly ash.
E. Building products shall be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2–2017, using the applicable exposure scenario. Organizations that certify manufacturers’ claims must be accredited under ISO Guide 65. Laboratories that conduct the tests specified in this credit must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use. The manufacturer or third-party’s certification shall state the exposure scenario used to determine compliance and shall state the range of total VOCs after 14 days. Claims of compliance for wet-applied products shall state the amount applied in mass per surface area. Statements of product compliance must follow product declaration guidelines in CDPH Standard Method v1.2-2017, Section 8. Manufacturer statements must also include a summary report from the laboratory that is less than three years old.
F. If the applicable regulation requires subtraction of exempt compounds, any content of intentionally added exempt compounds larger than 1% weight by mass (total exempt compounds) shall be disclosed.
G. Methylene chloride and perchloroethylene shall not be intentionally added in paints, coatings, adhesives, or sealants.
2.2 INTERIOR ADHESIVES
A. VOC Limits
1. The volatile organic compound (VOC) content of all field-applied adhesives, adhesive bonding primers, and adhesive primers used on the interior of this Project shall not exceed the limits defined in Rule 1168 - "Adhesive and Sealant Applications" of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), of the State of California, with a rule amendment date of October 6, 2017.
2. The VOC limits defined by SCAQMD are measured in grams per liter (g/L), less water and less exempt compounds.
3. General: For specified building construction related applications, the allowable VOC content is as follows:
a. Architectural Applications:
1) Building Envelope Membrane Adhesive 250
2) Carpet Pad Adhesive 50
3) Ceramic Tile Adhesive 65
4) Cove base adhesive 50
5) Drywall and panel adhesive 50
6) Multipurpose construction adhesive 70
7) Roofing
a) Single ply roof membrane adhesives 250
b) All other roof adhesives 250
8) Rubber Floor Adhesive 60
9) Structural glazing adhesive 100
10) Structural wood member adhesives 140
11) Subfloor adhesive 50
12) VCT and asphalt tile adhesive 50
13) Wood Flooring Adhesive 100
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 192
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
LOW EMITTING MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS 01 8116 - 6
14) All other indoor floor covering adhesives 50
15) All other outdoor floor covering adhesives 50
b. Specialty Applications:
1) Contact Adhesive 80
2) Edge glue adhesive 250
3) All other plastic cement
a) ABS welding 325
b) ABS to PVC transition cement 510
c) PVC welding 510
d) CPVC welding 490
e) All other plastic welding cements 250
4) Adhesive primer for plastic 550
5) Special Purpose Contact Adhesive 250
6) Adhesive Primer for Traffic Marking Tape 150
7) Structural Wood Member Adhesive 140
8) Top and trim adhesive 250
c. Substrate Specific Applications:
1) Metal to metal 30
2) Plastic foams 50
3) Porous material (except wood) 50
4) Wood 30
5) Fiberglass 80
6) Reinforced Plastic Composite 200
d. Other
1) Other adhesives 250
2) Adhesive bonding primers 250
3) Adhesive primers, or any other primers 250
e. Adhesive Primers:
1) Plastic 550
2) Pressure sensitive 785
3) Traffic marking tape 150
4) All other adhesive primers 250
2.3 INTERIOR SEALANTS
A. VOC Limits
1. The volatile organic compound (VOC) content of all field-applied adhesives, adhesive bonding primers, sealant primers and sealants used on the interior of this Project shall not exceed the limits defined in Rule 1168 - "Adhesive and Sealant Applications" of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), of the State of California, with a rule amendment date of October 6, 2017.
2. The VOC limits defined by SCAQMD are as follows. All VOC limits are defined in grams per liter, less water and less exempt compounds.
3. General: For specified building construction related applications, the allowable VOC content is as follows:
a. Sealants:
1) Clear, Paintable, and Immediately
Water-Resistant Sealant 250
2) Foam insulation and sealant 250
3) Grout Sealant 65
4) Non-Staining Plumbing Putty 150
5) Potable Water Sealant 100
6) Single Ply Roof Membrane Sealants 450
7) Other Roof Sealants 300
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 193
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
LOW EMITTING MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS 01 8116 - 7
8) All other Architectural Sealants 50
9) All other Sealants 420
b. Sealant Primer:
1) Architectural - Nonporous 250
2) Architectural- Porous 775
3) Modified Bituminous 500
4) Other 750
2.4 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL PAINTS
A. VOC Limits
1. VOC Content Requirements for Wet Applied Products: All paints and coatings wetapplied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective February 5, 2016. Product specific requirements are as follows:
a. Paints
1) Flat 50
2) Non-Flat 100
3) Non-Flat High Gloss Coatings 150
b. Coatings:
1) Aluminum roof coatings 100
2) Basement specialty coatings 400
3) Bituminous roof coatings 50
4) Bituminous roof primers 350
5) Bond breakers 350
6) Building envelope coatings 50
7) Concrete curing compounds 100
8) Concrete/Masonry Sealers 100
9) Concrete Surface Retarders 50
10) Dry fog coatings 50
11) Faux finishing coatings
a) Clear topcoat 100
b) Decorative coatings 350
c) Glazes 350
d) Japan 50
e) Trowel applied coatings 50
12) Fire resistive Coatings 150
13) Floor coatings 50
14) Form-release compounds 100
15) Graphic arts coatings (sign paints) 200
16) High temperature coatings 420
17) Industrial maintenance coatings 100
a) Color indicating safety coatings 480
b) High temperature IM coatings 420
c) Non-sacrificial anti-graffiti coatings 100
d) Zinc-rich IM primers 100
18) Low-Solids Coatings 120
19) Magnesite cement coatings 450
20) Mastic texture coatings 100
21) Metallic pigmented coatings 150
22) Multi-color coatings 250
23) Pre-treatment wash primers 420
24) Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters 100
25) Reactive penetrating sealers 350
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 194
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
LOW EMITTING MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS 01 8116 - 8
26) Recycled coatings 250
27) Roof Coatings 50
28) Rust Preventative Coatings 100
29) Sacrificial Anti-Graffit Coatings 50
30) Shellacs
a) Clear 730
b) Opaque 550
31) Specialty primers, sealers, and undercoaters 50
32) Stains 250
33) Stone Consolidants 450
34) Swimming Pool Coatings 340
35) Tile and Stone Sealers 100
36) Traffic Marking Coatings 100
37) Tub and Tile refinish Coatings 420
38) Waterproofing Membranes 100
39) Wood Coatings 275
40) Wood Preservatives 350
41) Zinc-rich Primers 340
2.5 INTERIOR COATINGS
A. VOC Limits
1. The volatile organic compound (VOC) content of all field-applied coating used on the interior of this Project shall not exceed the limits defined in Rule 1113 - "Architectural Coatings" of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), of the State of California, Amended February 5, 2016.
2. The VOC limits defined by SCAQMD are measured in grams per liter (g/L), less water and less exempt compounds.
3. If a product cannot reasonably be tested as specified above, testing of VOC content must comply with ASTM D2369-10; ISO 11890, part 1; ASTM D6886-03; or ISO 11890-2.
4. General: For specified building construction related applications, the allowable VOC content is as follows:
a. Coatings
1) Building Envelope Coatings 50
2) Clear Wood Finish:
a) Varnish 275
b) Sanding Sealers 275
c) Lacquer 275
3) Concrete-Curing Compounds 100
4) Dry Fog Coatings 50
5) Floor Coatings 50
6) Low-solids Coatings 120*
7) Magnesite Cement Coatings 450
8) Primers, Sealers and Undercoaters 100
9) Shellac
a) Clear 730
b) Pigmented 550
10) Stains 100
11) Waterproofing Sealers 100
12) Waterproofing Concrete/Masonry Sealers 100
13) Wood Preservatives 350
*Note: VOC levels for Low-Solids coatings are measured in grams of VOC per liter of material, including water.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 195
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
LOW EMITTING MATERIALS RESTRICTIONS 01 8116 - 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 196
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 1
SECTION 02 4119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owneroccupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.
2. Section 01 7300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 197
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 2
1.5 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.
C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage and demolition operations. Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.
F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.
G. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 198
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 3
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
E. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site that are not wanted by the Owner will be permitted on site where diversion of waste from landfill can be accomplished.
G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 199
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.
1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
D. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs and preconstruction videotapes.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."
2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 200
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 5
c. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
e. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least four hours after flame-cutting operations.
6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 201
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 6
8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.
D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.
E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 202
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 7
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according to Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 203
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.
4. Slotted channel framing.
5. Straps for new roof framing as indicated on S-0001.
6. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Fasteners.
2. Shop primers.
3. Slotted channel framing.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 204
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 2
3. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines and have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
2. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated-design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the jurisdiction in which Project is located.
B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 205
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
B. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
C. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
D. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section when available.
1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least 20% better than the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
a. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Steel
1) Rebar – 2.0 kg CO2eq per kg/.91 kg CO2eq per lb.
2) Wire & Mesh – 3.0 kg CO2eq per kg/ 1.4 kg CO2eq per lb. 3) Plate Steel 3.0 kg CO2eq per kg/1.4 kg CO2eq per lb. 4) Structural Steel
a) Hot-Rolled – 2.5 kg CO2eq per kg/ 1.1 kg CO2eq per lb. b) Hollow – 2.5 kg CO2eq per kg/ 1.1 kg CO2eq per lb.
5) Cold Formed Steel – 3.0 kg CO2eq per kg/ 1.4 kg CO2eq per lb. b. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.
c. Declared Units: 1 kilogram or 1 pound.
2. Product Category Rules:
a. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Structural Steels, v.1.0/1.6/1.0, 2017-11-
30. b. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Thin walled profiles and profiled panels of metal, v.1.0/1.7/1.0, 2019-01-08
c. International EPD System PCR for Basic iron or steel products & special steels, except construction products, v.2.0, 2020-03-27.
d. UL Environment PCR for Designated Steel Construction Products, v.2.0, 2020-12-
31. 3. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 206
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 4
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: As indicated.
2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0677- inch minimum thickness; unfinished.
H. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
J. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners fastening aluminum stainless steel or nickel silver.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
G. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1.
H. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 207
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 5
I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
K. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
L. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
M. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
N. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9123 Interior Painting." C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
D. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.
1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Duragrout by L&M/Laticrete or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Manufacturers not listed but who do offer products that comply with the requirements of this Section will be considered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures.
E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normalweight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 208
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 6
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 209
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 7
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
2.8 METAL BAR GRATINGS
A. Rectangular Bar Grating:
1. Traffic Surface: As indicated.
2. Finish: Galvanized.
3. Basis of Design: McNichols GW, Welded Rectangular Bar Grating.
B. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.
1. Provide not less than 4 saddle clips for each grating section composed of rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) or less in thickness and spaced 15/16 inch (24 mm) or more o.c., with each clip designed and fabricated to fit over 2 bearing bars.
2. Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to supports.
C. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings.
D. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.
2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates.
2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 210
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 8
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.
2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.
C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" and primers specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" unless indicated.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Ferrous Metals - SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaned Steel
2. Galvanized Metals - SSPC-SP16 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. Uniform scarification with using fine abrasive at 20-40 psi at the blast nozzle to minimizing damage to the galvanizing.
E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
2.13 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 211
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 9
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
C. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.
3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 212
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 10
A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details.
B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown.
C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 213
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
DECORATIVE METAL 05 7000 - 1
SECTION 05 7000
DECORATIVE METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum Ceiling panels.
2. Interior aluminum trim
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative metal items. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
5. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines and have at least a cradle to gate scope
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 214
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
DECORATIVE METAL 05 7000 - 2
and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative metal.
1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachment details.
2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design including mechanical finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1. Sections of linear shapes.
2. Samples of welded joints showing quality of workmanship and color matching of materials.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator and powder-coating applicator.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative metal similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups for decorative metal as indicated on drawings. a. Perforated Aluminum panel mockup, including 30"x30"x30" mockup of corner condition including integration of acoustic insulation behind. Show accessible panel in mock-up.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store decorative metal in a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry, and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
B. Deliver and store cast-metal products in wooden crates surrounded by enough packing material to ensure that products are not cracked or otherwise damaged.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 215
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
DECORATIVE METAL 05 7000 - 3
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with decorative metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Use materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
Use materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
C. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
D. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section when available.
1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least equal to the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
2. Embodied Carbon - Aluminum
a. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least 50%better than the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
b. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Aluminum
1) Cast Ingot – 18 kg CO2eq per kg/ 8 kg CO2eq per lb.
c. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.
d. Declared Units: 1 kilogram or 1 pound.
e. Product Category Rules:
1) Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Windows and doors, v.1.0/1.7/1.3, 2019-01-08
2) Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Products of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys, v.1.0/1.6/1.0, 2017-11-30
3. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
E. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 216
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
DECORATIVE METAL 05 7000 - 4
F. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:
1. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
G. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
H. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.2 ALUMINUM
A. Fabricate products from alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.
B. Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
C. Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.
D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003-H14.
E. Forgings: ASTM B 247, Alloy 6061-T6.
F. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Aluminum Items: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Uncoated-Steel Items: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed, Type 304 stainlesssteel fasteners where exposed.
3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring indicated items to other types of construction indicated.
C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting components and for attaching decorative metal items to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable.
1. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 217
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
DECORATIVE METAL 05 7000 - 5
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
B. Polyurethane Topcoat for Steel: Complying with MPI#72 and compatible with undercoat.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
2.5 PERFORATED ALUMINUM CEILING PANELS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by BOK Modern B47 Pattern.
B. Material: Aluminum panels, custom pattern as indicated on drawings.
C. Finish: High performance coating.
D. Sound-Absorptive Fabric Layer: Custom color Soundex sheet membrane shop applied to backs of panels. Non-woven fabric with Class 1 fire rating. Perforated panels with absorbing material to achieve an NRC of 0.70-0.80 minimum.
1. Products:
a. Owens Corning – SelectSound Black Acoustical Board
b. MBI Products – Blackout Theater Board
c. Thermafiber – SoundZero
d. Armstrong BioAcoustic Infill panel.
e. Knauf Black Acoustical Board.
E. Fabricate and install all extruded aluminum and formed sheet aluminum brake-metal work in conjunction with the work as detailed and as reasonably required to complete the work including sill extensions, snap trim pieces, jamb and sill trim, closures, coverings, flashings and other miscellaneous extruded and formed brake-metal work in conjunction with the Work of this Section.
1. Provide extruded shapes wherever possible, reserving formed work for conditions where extrusions are not applicable. Provide sharp bends in formed work without tearing, cracking, or grain separation of base metal.
2. Provide sheet metal panning not less than 0.05 inch thick. Reinforce panning as required to prevent oil canning.
3. Fasten trim clips, at not more than 16 inches on center.
F. Protect surfaces from marring when forming work. Provide sufficient material thickness with all necessary concealed reinforcement and anchorage to prevent “oil canning” or deformation of the finished work. Material deemed defective by the architect will be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
2.6 ALUMINUM BRAKE-METAL AND TRIM WORK
A. Fabricate and install all extruded aluminum and formed sheet aluminum brake-metal work in conjunction with the work as detailed and as reasonably required to complete the work including sill extensions, snap trim pieces, jamb and sill trim, closures, coverings, flashings and other miscellaneous extruded and formed brake-metal work in conjunction with the Work of this Section.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 218
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
DECORATIVE METAL 05 7000 - 6
1. Provide extruded shapes wherever possible, reserving formed work for conditions where extrusions are not applicable. Provide sharp bends in formed work without tearing, cracking, or grain separation of base metal.
2. Provide sheet metal panning not less than 0.05 inch thick. Reinforce panning as required to prevent oil canning.
3. Fasten trim clips, at not more than 16 inches on center.
B. Protect surfaces from marring when forming work. Provide sufficient material thickness with all necessary concealed reinforcement and anchorage to prevent “oil canning” or deformation of the finished work. Material deemed defective by the architect will be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
3. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work.
D. Form simple and compound curves in bars, pipe, tubing, and extruded shapes by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.
E. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
F. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
G. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.
H. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as needed to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
I. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Weld behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
1. Where welding cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finish joints to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 Welds: no evidence of a welded joint.
2. Make welds uniform and smooth. Contour and blend welds and weld transitions between members, removing splatter exposed to view.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 219
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
DECORATIVE METAL 05 7000 - 7
2.8 FABRICATION OF METAL TRIM
A. Fabricate trim to designs indicated from Aluminum bars and shapes of sizes and profiles indicated.
2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample.
2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Ferrous Metals - SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaned Steel B. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of items unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Shop prime uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces with primers specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." unless indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative metal.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in-place construction.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative metal. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 220
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
DECORATIVE METAL 05 7000 - 8
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting, welding, and grinding are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of decorative metal, restore finishes to eliminate evidence of such corrective work.
D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.
E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses.
F. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work yet to be performed at same location.
1. Retain protective coverings intact; remove coverings simultaneously from similarly finished items to preclude nonuniform oxidation and discoloration.
G. Field Welding: Comply with applicable AWS specification for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding and requirements for welding and for finishing welded connections in "Fabrication, General" Article. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
H. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.3 INSTALLING DECORATIVE WALL AND CEILING PANELS
A. Fabricate panels from aluminum unless otherwise indicated.
1. Fasten frames to supporting walls with anchors as indicated.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." C. Protect finishes of decorative metal from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by decorative metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.
D. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 221
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 1
SECTION 06 1053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
3. Wood furring and grounds.
4. Wood sleepers.
5. Plywood backing panels.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 1600 "Sheathing."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 222
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 2
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.
4. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.
5. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
6. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
7. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines and have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
C. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 223
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
B. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.
1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least 50%better than the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
a. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Wood
1) Dimension Lumber – 100 kg CO2eq per m3/ 80 kg CO2eq per yd3 a) Wood Framing
2) Composite Lumber – 400 kg CO2eq per m3/ 310 kg CO2eq per yd3 b. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.
c. Declared Units: 1 meter or 1 cubic meter/ 1 foot or cubic yard. d. Product Category Rules:
1) ASTM International PCR for North American Pressure-treated Wood Products, v.1, 2016-06-29
2) SCS Global Services PCR for Roundwood, v.1, 2016-10-18 3) Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Wood based panels, v.1.0/1.7/1.1, 2019-01-07.
4) UL Environment PCR for North American Structural and Architectural Wood Products, v.1, 2019-10-21.
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
D. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
E. Low-emitting requirements – Composite Wood:
1. Composite Wood Evaluation - Composite wood, as defined by the California Air Resources Board, Airborne Toxic Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products Regulation, shall be documented to have low formaldehyde emissions which meet the California Air Resources Board ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde resins.
F. Certified Wood: Lumber and plywood shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 224
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 4
G. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
H. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire8.d November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 225
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 5
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.
4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.
C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.
E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Concealed blocking.
2. Roof framing and blocking.
3. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing.
4. Plywood backing panels.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 226
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 6
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
6. Northern species; NLGA.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common grade; NELMA.
4. Northern species, No. 3 Common grade; NLGA.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5 PLYWOOD PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
B. Plywood Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 or ICC-ES AC193 as appropriate for the substrate.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Where required for compatibility with wood treatment:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 227
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 7
a. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
F. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 or ICC-ES AC193 as appropriate for the substrate.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Where required for compatibility with wood treatment:
a. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. KC Metals Products, Inc.
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Titebond Original wood glue by Franklin International or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Manufacturers not listed but who do offer products that comply with the requirements of this Section will be considered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures.
B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
C. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 228
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.
4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c.
H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
J. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 229
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 9
K. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 230
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 1
SECTION 06 1600
SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Parapet sheathing.
4. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines and have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 231
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution:
1. Provide Mock-up Panel as indicated on drawings and as detailed in Section 01 4000 “Quality Requirements”.
a. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wall intersection.
b. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
B. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.
1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least equal to the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
a. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Glass Mat Sheathing 1) Gypsum Board – 4500 kg CO2eq per 1000 m2/420 kgCO2 eq 1,000 per ft2 2) System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.
3) Declared Units: 1 square meter or 1 square foot.
4) Product Category Rules:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 232
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 3
a) ASTM International PCR for North American Glass Mat Gypsum Panels, v.1, 2016-08-01.
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
F. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.2 WALL SHEATHING
A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc.
b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP.
d. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick.
3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.
2.3 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Roof Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc.
b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Deck.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP.
d. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick.
3. Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm) for vertical installation.
2.4 PARAPET SHEATHING
A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc.
b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP.
d. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick.
3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 233
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 4
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof parapet and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
D. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002.
2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954.
2.6 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and TwoFamily Dwellings." D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 234
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 5
F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.
3.2 GLASS MAT SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements.
3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.
C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.
1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.
2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.
D. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.
E. Air-Barrier and Water-Resistant Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing:
1. Install accessory materials according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction, to seal fasteners, and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.
a. Coordinate the installation of sheathing with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. b. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing, so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.
2. Connect and seal sheathing material continuously to air barriers specified under other Sections as well as to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.
3. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
4. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply preformed silicone extrusion, so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact. a. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and air-barrier material.
5. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of sheathing material with foam sealant.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 235
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEATHING 06 1600 - 6
6. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic.
7. Seal top of through-wall flashings to sheathing with an additional 6-inch-wide, transition strip.
8. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
9. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 236
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 1
SECTION 06 4023
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Wood Cabinets for Transparent Finish
3. Wood wall and ceiling panels
4. Wood benches.
5. Closet and utility shelving.
6. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing interior architectural woodwork items that are not concealed within other construction.
7. Shop priming of interior architectural woodwork.
8. Shop finishing of interior architectural woodwork.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing interior architectural woodwork that are concealed within other construction before interior architectural woodwork installation.
2. Section 12 3600 “Countertops”.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Anchors.
2. Adhesives.
3. Shop finishing materials.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 237
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 2
4. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include data and warranty information from chemicaltreatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
5. Waterborne Treatments: For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.
4. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.
5. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
6. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
7. Product Data: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
8. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for ceilings, walls, acoustical and thermal insulation, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
9. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines and have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings: For interior architectural woodwork.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Show large-scale details.
3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including blocking and reinforcement concealed by construction and specified in other Sections.
4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural cabinets.
5. For paneling, Show location of paneling, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations.
6. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and finish specified, in manufacturer's or fabricator's standard size.
1. Lumber for Transparent Finish: Not less than 5 inches wide by 24 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.
2. Veneer Leaves: Representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparentfinished interior architectural woodwork.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 238
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 3
3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.
4. Corner Pieces:
a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails and at exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.
b. Miter joints for standing trim.
5. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of product including the following:
1. Composite wood and agrifiber products.
2. Glass.
3. Adhesives.
C. Evaluation Reports: For preservative-treated and fire-retardant-treated wood materials, from ICC-ES.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator and Manufacturer Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who customfabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
D. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups of typical interior architectural woodwork as shown on Drawings.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 2.
B. Do not deliver interior architectural woodwork until painting and similar finish operations that might damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas.
C. Store woodwork in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.
1. Handle and store fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 239
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 4
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
C. Established Dimensions: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard.
B. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.
1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least equal to the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
a. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Wood
1) Dimension Lumber – 100 kg CO2eq per m3/ 80 kg CO2eq per yd3 a) Wood Framing
2) Composite Lumber – 400 kg CO2eq per m3/ 310 kg CO2eq per yd3 b. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.
c. Declared Units: 1 meter or 1 cubic meter/ 1 foot or cubic yard. d. Product Category Rules:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 240
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 5
1) ASTM International PCR for North American Pressure-treated Wood Products, v.1, 2016-06-29
2) SCS Global Services PCR for Roundwood, v.1, 2016-10-18 3) Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Wood based panels, v.1.0/1.7/1.1, 2019-01-07.
4) UL Environment PCR for North American Structural and Architectural Wood Products, v.1, 2019-10-21.
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:
1. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
F. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
G. Low-emitting requirements – Composite Wood:
1. Composite Wood Evaluation - Composite wood, as defined by the California Air Resources Board, Airborne Toxic Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products Regulation, shall be documented to have low formaldehyde emissions which meet the California Air Resources Board ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde resins.
H. Certified Wood: Lumber and plywood shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.
I. Additional Low-emitting requirements –Thermal and Acoustic Insulation
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.
2. Methylene chloride and perchloroethylene shall not be intentionally added in insulation products.
J. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium.
B. Hardwood Lumber:
1. Species: Red Alder.
2. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn.
3. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 241
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 6
4. For trim items other than base wider than available lumber, use veneered construction.
Do not glue for width.
5. For base wider than available lumber, glue for width. Do not use veneered construction.
6. For rails thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for thickness.
2.3 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood or MDF where indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
2.4 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Type of Construction: Frameless.
C. Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
D. Wood for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Species: Red Alder.
2. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn.
3. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
4. Veneer Matching:
a. Veneer Leaves: Slip match.
b. Within Panel Faces: Balance match within panel face. c. Cabinet veneers in each space from a single flitch.
5. Shelving: ¾ inch unless otherwise noted.
E. Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed surfaces, stained to match.
2. Drawer Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: Solid-hardwood lumber.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
F. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.
G. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.
1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.
2.5 WOOD WALL AND CEILING PANELS – FLUSH WOOD PANELING
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species and Cut:
1. Species: Red Alder.
2. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn.
C. Veneer Matching Method:
1. Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Slip match.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 242
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 7
2. Within Panel Face: Balance match.
3. Adjacent Veneer Leaves and within Panel Face: Slip, center-balance, or book match.
D. Vertical Panel-Matching Method: Continuous end match; veneer leaves of upper panels are continuations of veneer leaves of lower panels.
E. Panel Core Construction: Hardwood veneer-core plywood.
1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Finish: Transparent finish
F. Exposed Panel Edges: Inset solid-wood or wood-veneer matching faces.
2.6 PEGBOARD PANELS AT WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
B. Size: 4’0” by 8’0”.
2.7 WOOD BENCHES
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species for transparent finish: as indicated on finish schedule C. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): any closed grained hardwood.
D. Trim:
1. Solid wood as indicated.
2. Provide steel framing and trim. Finish as indicated.
E. Adjustable Shelving: Storage Systems as shown on drawings with hardware indicated.
F. Provide upholstered seat cushion as indicated.
G. Banquette Cushions
1. Seat Cushion:
a. 2.7# density foam with a compression rating of 40.
b. Wrap foam fully in 1/2 oz. Fire retardant treated dacron.
2. Seat Back:
a. 1.8 – 2.0# density foam with a compression rating of 24-28. b. Wrap foam fully in 1/2 oz. Fire retardant treated dacron. c. Include polyethylene moisture barrier at seat cushion backs.
3. Springs: Coil type; copperized steel.
4. Fabric: As listed in the Finish Schedule.
5. Cushion Fabrication:
a. Cover for tight and smooth appearance.
b. Fabricate for tight fit between cushions and adjacent construction. c. Provide boxed edge with luggage stitch seams.
d. Provide heat resistant zipper along length of cushion at the backside. e. Fabricate cushion with 3/8 inch MDO plywood backing.
6. Cushions should be removable for cleaning.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 243
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 8
2.8 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Closet Shelving: Made from one of the following material, 3/4 inch thick.
1. MDF with solid-wood edge.
C. Clothes Rods: Chrome-plated steel tubes.
2.9 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of interior architectural woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide.
2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of interior architectural woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Recycled Content of MDF and Particleboard: Postconsumer recycled content plus onehalf of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
a. Basis of Design: "Medite" 3/4 inch thick, by Roseburg.
3. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density.
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
5. Hardwood Veneer Plywood: HPVA HP-1, Non-toxic, urea formaldehyde free: with soybased adhesive:
a. Basis of Design: Purebond by Columbia Forest Products Inc.
6. Fire Rated Plywood FR plywood where noted: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 sheathing.
a. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1 1/8 inches and as indicated.
2.10 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED-WOOD MATERIALS
A. Preservative-Treated-Wood Materials: Provide with water-repellent preservative treatment complying with AWPA N1 (dip, spray, flood, or vacuum-pressure treatment).
1. Preservative Chemicals: 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC), combined with a compatible EPA-registered insecticide.
2. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material.
B. Extent of Preservative-Treated Wood Materials: Treat interior architectural woodwork in contact with concrete or masonry.
1. Items fabricated from the following wood species need not be treated:
a. Redwood.
b. Western red cedar.
c. White oak.
d. African mahogany.
e. Honduras mahogany.
f. Ipe.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 244
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 9
g. Dark red meranti.
h. Teak.
2.11 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.
3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively.
2. For items indicated to receive a stained, transparent, or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation.
3. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.
C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard (MDF) panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smokedeveloped index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Roseburg, Medite FR.
2.12 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing, soft-close.
C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter.
E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports:
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 245
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 10
2. ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.
G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
H. Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, soft close.
1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer. a. Type: Full extension.
b. Material: Zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.
2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-platedsteel, ball-bearing slides.
3. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.
4. For drawers more than 3 inches high, but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.
5. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD200.
6. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100.
7. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-200.
I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
J. Drawer Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07041.
K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
L. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated.
1. Unframed Glass Doors: Seam exposed edges seamed before tempering.
M. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Shelves: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick.
N. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1. Color: Black.
2. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Doug Mockett & Co, Inc.
O. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: ANSI/BHMA 613 for bronze base; ANSI/BHMA 640 for steel base; match Architect's sample.
P. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
1. Preservative Treatment: Provide softwood lumber treated by pressure process, AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
a. Provide where in contact with concrete or masonry.
b. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 246
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 11
c. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
d. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
2. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Complying with requirements; provide where indicated.
B. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer.
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Titebond Original wood glue by Franklin Internationsl or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Manufacturers not listed but who do offer products that comply with the requirements of this Section will be considered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures.
E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
2.14 FABRICATION
A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.
B. Fabricate interior architectural woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.
C. Fabricate interior architectural woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
1. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
a. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.
D. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
E. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual."
1. For glass in frames, secure glass with removable stops.
2. For exposed glass edges, polish and grind smooth.
F. Core Material:
1. Horizontal surfaces: All hardwood veneer core plywood
2. Vertical Surfaces: All hardwood veneer core plywood or MDF 40 at Contractor’s option.
3. Vertical Surface with flame spread requirements: Fire-Retardant Fiberboard.
4. Doors: Provide solid bearing for hinges.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 247
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 12
2.15 SHOP PRIMING
A. Interior Architectural Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer as specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.
2.16 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish interior architectural woodwork with transparent finish at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of interior architectural woodwork. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Same as item to be finished.
2. Finish: System - 2, precatalyzed lacquer 3, postcatalyzed lacquer or 5, conversion varnish.
3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.
4. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition interior architectural woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B. Before installing interior architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install interior architectural woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble interior architectural woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install interior architectural woodwork level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion.
1. Shim as required with concealed shims.
2. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 248
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 13
D. Scribe and cut interior architectural woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4.
F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.
G. Anchor interior architectural woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.
1. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing.
2. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with interior architectural woodwork.
3. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.
H. Standing and Running Trim:
1. Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible.
2. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary.
3. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
4. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler; sand smooth; and finish same as wood base if finished.
5. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
3.3 INSTALLATION – WALL AND CEILING PANELS
A. Install paneling level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane.
1. For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.
B. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with blind nailing.
1. Do not use face fastening unless covered by trim.
C. Anchor Modular Wall Panels to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips.
D. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of paneling. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.
E. Refer to Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for final finishing of installed paneling.
1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 249
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 14
3.4 INSTALLATION – CABINETS
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.
B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with cabinet surface.
1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.
D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inchesusing concealed shims.
1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
3. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
4. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
3.5 REPAIR
A. Repair damaged and defective interior architectural woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects and to result in interior architectural woodwork being in compliance with requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade.
B. Where not possible to repair, replace defective woodwork.
C. Shop Finish: Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of interior architectural woodwork.
1. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
2. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied.
D. Field Finish: See Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for final finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean interior architectural woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 250
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 1
SECTION 07 2100
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
5. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for acoustical and thermal insulation, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “LowEmitting Materials Restrictions”.
6. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines and have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 251
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 2
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B. Mockups: Install insulation in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive products specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
B. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.
1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least equal to the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
2. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines:
a. Board – 100 kgCO2 eq per M2-Rsi/ 9 kgCO2 eq per ft2-R5.68 b. Blanket – 8 kgCO2 eq per M2-Rsi/ 0.7 kgCO2 eq per ft2-R5.68
3. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 252
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 3
4. Declared Units: 1 square meter with thickness so that R_SI (average thermal resistance) = 1 m2K/W.
5. Product Category Rules:
a. UL Environment PCR for Building Envelope Thermal Insulation, v.2, 2018-04-10. b. UL Environment PCR for Calculation Rules for the LCA and Requirements on the Project Report, v3.2, 2018-12-11.
c. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Mineral insulating materials, v1.1, 2018- 12-11.
d. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Calculation Rules for the LCA and Requirements on the Project Report, v1.3, 2014-06-19.
6. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
D. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
E. Additional Low-emitting requirements –Insulation within the weatherproofing barrier:
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.
2. Methylene chloride and perchloroethylene shall not be intentionally added in insulation products.
F. Foam Insulation:
1. Foam insulation: Provide fire retardants that contain no hexabromocyclododecane (HBCD) flame retardants. Use Polymeric flame retardants (PolyFR) in lieu of these products.
G. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Glass-Fiber-Mat Faced: ASTM C 1289, glass-fiber-mat faced, Type II, Class 2.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Atlas ACFoam and EnergyShield
b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. – Polyiso Board Insulation c. GAF – Energyguard NH HD Plus Polyiso
d. Versico – Polyiso Board Insulation
2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.
3. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 253
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 4
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET ACOUSTIC INSULATION
A. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
1. Acoustic Performance at 1-1/2inch: NRC 0.85
2. Thickness: as required for STC rating indicated.
B. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. AFB EVO by Rockwool Inc
2. Owens Corning - Thermafiber UltraBatt FF
3. Manufacturers not listed but who do offer products that comply with the requirements of this Section will be considered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures.
C. Sustainability Requirements: Provide Mineral-Wool Blanket insulation as follows:
1. Recycled Content: Recycled content not less than 70 percent.
2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place.
1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.
B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanizedsteel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.
C. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 2 inches between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.
D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 254
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed.
D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
E. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Mineral Wool insulation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 255
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 6
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up either side of partitions.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 256
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 1 SECTION 07 2715
NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Self-adhering, vapor-permeable, nonbituminous sheet air barriers.
2. Self-adhering flashing at intersections of air barrier system.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 1600 "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint-and-penetration treatments.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air.
B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.
C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessories applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating each substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 257
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 2
4. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.
1. Show locations and extent of air-barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions.
2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.
3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors employed by Installer, who work on Project.
B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with air barrier.
C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project.
B. Mockups: Install air barriers in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive products specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution:
1. Provide Mock-up Panel as indicated on drawings and as detailed in Section 01 4000 “Quality Requirements”.
a. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 258
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 3
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.
1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance.
2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2357.
C. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
D. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.
1. Environmental Product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:
1. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
F. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.3 NONBITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIER
A. Vapor-Permeable Nonbituminous Sheet: Minimum 20-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of a breathable carrier film or fabric and an adhesive with release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer that complies with VOC limits.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 259
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 4 a. Henry Company; Blueskin VP 160.
b. VaproShield WrapShield SA
c. GCP Perm-a-barrier VPS
2. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Puncture Resistance: Minimum 40 lbf; ASTM E 154/E 154M. c. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 15 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method, Procedure A.
d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to ASTM D 4541 as modified by ABAA.
e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.
f. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 150 days according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air-barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0250 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.
D. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.
E. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. c. Pecora Corporation.
d. Tremco Incorporated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.
2. Verify that substrates have cured and aged for minimum time recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 260
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 5
3. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test concrete substrates for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.
E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.
H. Bridge isolation joints expansion joints and discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and deck-todeck joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.
1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
2. Do not apply to wet substrates.
3. Do not allow contamination with dust or dirt.
4. Seal completely at edges, perimeter, and penetrations B. Prepare, treat, and seal inside and outside corners and vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations with termination mastic.
C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier sheet on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 261
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 6 D. Apply and firmly adhere air-barrier sheets over area to receive air barrier. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure airtight installation.
1. Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water.
2. Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate.
E. Apply continuous air-barrier sheets over accessory strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.
F. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air-barrier sheet with an additional 6-inch-wide, transition strip.
G. Seal exposed edges of sheet at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
H. Install air-barrier sheet and accessory materials to form a seal with adjacent construction and to maintain a continuous air barrier.
1. Coordinate air-barrier installation with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.
I. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier sheet continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.
J. At end of each working day, seal top edge of air-barrier material to substrate with termination mastic.
K. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
L. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of doors. Apply preformed silicone extrusion so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
1. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and air-barrier material.
M. Wall Openings Transition Assembly Installation: Apply opening transition assembly so that a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) of coverage is achieved over adjacent sheathing board substrate.
1. Apply window manufacturer's recommended silicone joint sealant bedding bead to aluminum frame and mechanically attach transition assembly aluminum race to aluminum frame.
2. Embed transition assembly in continuous application of fluid-applied flashing on sheathing board surface.
N. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of airbarrier material with foam sealant.
O. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with air-barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 262
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 7 P. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency.
Q. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following:
1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes.
2. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided.
3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings.
4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained.
5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.
6. Surfaces have been primed.
7. Laps in sheet materials have complied with the minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.
8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.
9. Air barrier has been firmly adhered to substrate.
10. Compatible materials have been used.
11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided.
12. Connections between assemblies (air barrier and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal.
13. All penetrations have been sealed.
C. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests:
1. Air-Leakage-Location Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers.
2. Air-Leakage-Volume Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for air-leakage rate according to ASTM E 783 or ASTM E 2357.
3. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for required adhesion to substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or part thereof.
D. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.
2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.
E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 263
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 8
1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer than recommended, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, airbarrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.
B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed Work, using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 264
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 1
SECTION 07 5113
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING, COLD APPLIED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cold-applied built-up asphalt roofing system on metal and concrete decks including but not limited to:
a. Substrate board (metal deck).
b. Vapor retarder.
c. Roof insulation.
d. Roof insulation cover board.
e. Roofing membrane ply sheets.
f. Base flashings.
g. Walkway material.
B. Section includes the installation of sound-absorbing insulation strips in ribs of roof deck. Soundabsorbing insulation strips are furnished under Section 05 3100 "Steel Decking." C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking, and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.
2. Section 06 1600 "Sheathing" for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.
3. Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.
4. Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and counterflashings.
5. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 "Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing" and glossary in applicable edition of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual:
Membrane Roof Systems" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review drawings and specifications.
3. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 265
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 2
5. Examine substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.
6. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
7. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing.
8. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
9. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing during and after installation.
10. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
11. Contractor to minimize work done over completed roofing system. Any work done over completed roofing system must include temporary protection of the roof.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For insulation and roof system component fasteners, include copy of FM Approvals' RoofNav listing.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Test Reports: For roof materials, documentation indicating that roof materials comply with Solar Reflectance Index requirements.
4. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
5. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system, include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Provide roof plan showing orientation and types of roof deck, orientation of membrane roofing, and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened components.
1. Base flashings and built-up terminations.
a. Indicate that details meet requirements of this Section.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.
4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
5. Membrane fastening or adhesion requirements.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Sheet roofing materials, of color specified for exposed material.
2. Walkway materials.
3. Metal termination bars.
E. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system indicating compliance with wind uplift performance requirements for each zone of the roof (field, perimeter and corners)
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 266
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 3
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer manufacturer and testing agency.
1. Include letter from Manufacturer written for this Project indicating approval of Installer.
B. Contractor's Product Certificate: Submit notarized certificate, indicating products intended for Work of this Section, including product names and numbers and manufacturers' names, with statement indicating that products to be provided meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of built-up roofing.
D. Warranties: Unexecuted sample copies of special warranties.
E. Field Quality Control Reports: Reports of Roofing Inspector. Include weather conditions, description of work performed, tests performed, defective work observed, and Contractor's corrective actions taken to correct defective work.
1. Submit reports within 48 hours after inspection
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.
B. Warranties: Executed copies of warranties.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and certified by manufacturer, including a full-time on-site supervisor with a minimum of five years' experience installing similar work, able to communicate verbally with Contractor, Architect, and employees, and qualified by the manufacturer to furnish warranty of type specified.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for roofing system identical to that used for this Project. Approved manufacturer with UL listed roofing systems comparable to those specified for this Project, with minimum five years' experience in manufacture of comparable products in successful use in similar applications, and able to furnish warranty with provisions matching specified requirements.
C. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review:
1. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements.
2. Samples of each component.
3. Sample submittal from similar project.
4. Project references: Minimum of five installations of specified products not less than five years old, with Owner and Architect contact information.
5. Sample warranty.
6. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Division 01 General Requirements.
D. Roofing Inspector Qualifications: A technical representative of manufacturer, not engaged in the sale of products, and experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system, qualified to perform roofing observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control Article to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements of this Project, and approved
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 267
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 4
by the manufacturer to issue warranty certification. The Roofing Inspector shall be one of the following:
1. An authorized full-time technical employee of the manufacturer.
2. An independent party certified as a Registered Roof Observer by the Roof Consultants Institute, retained by the Contractor or the Manufacturer and approved by the Manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing manufacturer.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources.
1. Store in a dry location.
2. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.
1.10 PROJECT / FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Daily Protection: Coordinate installation of roofing so insulation and other components of roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing and insulation with a course of roofing sheet securely in place with joints and edges sealed.
2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing.
3. Remove temporary plugs from roof drains at end of each day.
4. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Roof System Manufacturer's standard form in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period, as follows.
1. Form of Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty form.
2. Scope of Warranty: Work of this Section and including sheet metal details and termination details installed by the roof system Installer and approved by the Roof System Manufacturer.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 268
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 5
3. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of completion, no dollar limit.
B. Manufacturer Inspection Services: By manufacturer's technical representative, to report maintenance responsibilities to Owner necessary for preservation of Owner's warranty rights.
The cost of manufacturer's inspections is included in the Contract Sum.
1. Inspections to occur in following years: 2, 5, 10, 15 following completion.
C. Installer Warranty: Installer's warranty signed by Installer, as follows.
1. Form of Warranty: Form acceptable to Roofing Manufacturer and Owner.
2. Scope of Warranty: Work of this Section.
3. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system and flashings shall remain watertight.
1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155.
2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D3746/C3746M, ASTM D4272/D4272M, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470.
B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the uplift pressures indicated on drawings.
D. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift pressures when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897: as indicated on drawings.
E. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
F. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.
1. Environmental Product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
G. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
H. Roofing:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 269
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 6
1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) – Low slope: Three-year-aged SRI not less than 64 or initial SRI not less than 82 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.
2. ENERGY STAR Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.
I. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
J. Flashings and Fastening: Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component materials and installation techniques that comply with requirements and recommendations of the following:
1. NRCA Roofing Manual (Sixth Edition) for construction details and recommendations.
2. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (Seventh Edition) for construction details.
3. Comply with requirements of Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim".
K. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency.
1. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
L. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.
1. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. Ply Sheets:
1. SBS-modified asphalt coated composite polyester / fiberglass/fiberglass mat reinforced high tensile strength base sheet, ASTM D4601 Type II.
B. Membrane Flashing Sheets:
1. Flashing Sheet, Thermoset: Elastomeric polyester reinforced sheet with EPDM and SBR elastomers.
C. Detailing Fabric:
1. Woven Glass Fiber Mesh, Vinyl-Coated: Non-shrinking, non-rotting, vinyl-coated woven glass mesh for reinforcing flashing seams, membrane laps, and other roof system detailing.
2.3 COLD-APPLIED ADHESIVE MATERIALS
A. General: Adhesive and sealant materials recommended by roofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Asphalt Primer:
1. Asphalt primer, Solvent-based.
C. Ply Sheet Adhesive:
1. Cold-applied roofing adhesive and surfacer, one-part, formulated for compatibility and use with specified roofing membranes and flashings.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 270
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 7
D. Flashing Sheet Adhesive:
1. Bonding and Flashing Adhesive, SEBS/SIS modified asphalt, for elastomeric flashing membranes.
E. Flashing Sheet Adhesive Primer:
1. Primer for Flashing Adhesive, primer to promote adhesion coatings on single-ply membrane flashings.
2.4 AUXILIARY BUILT-UP ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing membrane.
B. Stripping Reinforcing Fabric:
1. Polyester Reinforcing and Protection Fabric: 100 percent stitch-bonded mildew-resistant polyester fabric intended for reinforcement of compatible fluid-applied membranes and flashings and as a protection layer under pavers or stone aggregates.
C. Elastomeric Mastic:
1. Roofing Mastic, Low-Volatile: Modified asphalt elastomeric roof mastic, one-part, trowelgrade, formulated for compatibility and use with specified roofing membranes and flashings.
D. Stripping Adhesive / Sealer:
1. Seam Sealer: Aromatic polyurethane sealer, single-component, high solids, moisture curing, formulated for compatibility and use with a variety of roofing and flashing substrates.
E. Joint Sealant: Elastomeric joint sealant compatible with roofing materials, with movement capability appropriate for application.
1. Joint Sealant, Polyurethane: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50 single-component moisture curing sealant, formulated for compatibility and use in dynamic and static joints; paintable.
F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening built-up roofing components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing manufacturer.
G. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by built-up roofing manufacturer.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Vapor Retarder Membrane:
1. SBS-modified asphalt coated composite polyester / fiberglass/fiberglass mat reinforced high tensile strength base sheet, ASTM D4601 Type II.
B. Vapor Retarder Adhesive:
1. Cold-applied roofing adhesive and surfacer, one-part, formulated for compatibility and use with specified roofing membranes and flashings.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 271
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 8
C. Vapor Retarder Primer (Concrete deck):
1. Asphalt primer, water-based, polymer modified.
D. Sheathing Paper at CLT decks: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m).
2.6 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by PVC roof membrane manufacturer, approved for use in FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assemblies.
B. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roof membrane manufacturer.
1. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated, not less than two times the roof slope.
C. Roof Insulation:
1. Board Insulation, Polyisocyanurate: CFC- and HCFC- free, with recycled content glassfiber mat facer on both major surfaces, ASTM C1289 Type II Class 1. a. Compressive Strength, ASTM C1621: Grade 2: 20 psi (138 kPa). b. Conditioned Thermal Resistance at 75 deg. F (24 deg. C): 14.4 at 2.5 inches (50.8 mm) thick.
D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with other roofing system components.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover board to substrate and acceptable to roofing manufacturer.
C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
1. Modified asphaltic, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive.
D. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board.
E. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."
F. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
c. National Gypsum Company.
d. USG Corporation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 272
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 9
G. Joint Tape: 6- or 8-inch-wide, coated, glass fiber.
2.8 WALKWAYS
A. Walkway Material:
1. Solid-rubber surface-textured slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. wood cants
3. CLT and Steel Roof Deck:
a. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking."
b. Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units in excess of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) out of plane relative to adjoining deck.
4. Concrete Roof Deck:
a. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing manufacturer has passed.
b. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM F 2170. c. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction.
C. Concrete Surface Priming: Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate required by manufacturer and allow primer to dry.
D. Perform fastener-pullout tests according to roof system manufacturer's recommendations at CLT decks.
1. Submit test result within 24 hours of performing tests. a. Include manufacturer's requirements for any revision to previously submitted fastener patterns required to achieve specified wind uplift requirements.
E. Acoustical Steel Deck Insulation: Install acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips, specified in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking," according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions, immediately before installation of overlying construction and to remain dry.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 273
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 10
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.
B. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, approved shop drawings, and Contract Documents.
C. Install wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers in accordance with requirements of Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."
3.4 ROOFING INSTALLATION DETAILS
A. NRCA Installation Details: Install roofing system in accordance with applicable NRCA Manual Plates and NRCA recommendations; modify as required to comply with manufacturer's approved details.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER
A. Vapor Retarder Installation, General: Completely seal vapor retarder/air barrier at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system. Seal vapor retarder/air barrier to air barrier in adjacent construction at perimeter of roofing system.
B. SBS Modified Sheet Vapor Retarder: Install one lapped vapor retarder course and adhere in a uniform coating of cold-applied adhesive, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Vapor barrier not to be used as a temporary roof membrane.
3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Comply with built-up roofing manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
B. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
C. Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree cant strips at junctures of built-up roofing with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.
D. Tapered Insulation and Crickets: Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
1. Where crickets are indicated or required to provide positive slope to drain, make slope of crickets minimum of two times the roof slope and not less than 1/4 inch in 12 inches.
E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
F. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 274
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 11
1. Tapered Insulation System for Flat Roof Deck: Install insulation as follows:
a. Minimum total thickness of Continuous Insulation:. 5.2 inches b. Minimum Continuous Insulation R-value: Not less than. 30
2. Insulation Drain Sumps: Tapered insulation sumps, not less than 2 by 2 feet, sloped to roof drain, with a minimum insulation thickness of not less than one inch less than the Project-stipulated continuous insulation thickness based upon code requirements.
G. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.
H. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
I. Adhered Insulation Application Method: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:
1. Prime substrate with primer as recommended by manufacturer and allow to dry.
2. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
J. Cover Board Installation: Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together. Tape joints if required by roofing manufacturer.
1. Set cover board in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining cover in place.
3.7 COLD-APPLIED BUILT-UP ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations in NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing" and as follows:
1. Number of Ply Sheets: Four.
a. Adhering Method: Cold-applied adhesive.
B. Start installation of built-up roofing in presence of manufacturer's technical personnel.
C. Cooperate with testing agencies and personnel engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing.
D. Coordinate installation of roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work configured as recommended by NRCA Roofing Manual Appendix: Quality Control Guidelines - Insulation to protect new roofing.
2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing.
3. Remove temporary plugs from roof drains at end of each day.
4. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
E. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt and adhesives from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging built-up roofing components or adjacent building construction.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 275
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 12
3.8 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install lapped base-ply sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:
1. Adhere to substrate in cold-applied adhesive.
B. Ply Sheets: Install ply sheets starting at low point of roofing. Align ply sheets without stretching.
Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants.
1. Embed each ply sheet in cold-applied membrane adhesive applied at rate required by roofing manufacturer, to form a uniform membrane without ply sheets touching.
3.9 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to built-up roofing manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) above built-up roofing and 6 inches (150 mm) onto field of built-up roofing.
2. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by built-up roofing manufacturer.
3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in cold-applied adhesive.
Apply cold-applied flashing sheet adhesive to back of flashing sheet if recommended by roofing manufacturer. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
a. Flashing Sheet Top Termination: Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
1) Seal top termination of base flashing with a metal termination bar. b. Flashing Sheet Bottom Termination: Adhere flashing sheet to roofing membrane in continuous bed of cold-applied adhesive.
1) Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Heat weld vertical flashing joints. Seal bottom termination of base flashing by adhering to roofing membrane with coldapplied adhesive and sealing flashing-to-membrane joint with joint sealant.
B. Install stripping, according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing.
C. Flashing-Sheet Stripping: Install flashing-sheet stripping in a continuous coating of manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, and extend onto roofing membrane. Apply number of courses recommended by manufacturer.
D. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch (760-by-760-mm) metal flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed built-up roofing. Cover metal flashing with built-up roofing cap-sheet stripping and extend a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of built-up roofing. Clamp built-up roofing, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring.
1. Install flashing sheet stripping according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions.
3.10 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Walkways, General: Install walkways according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install walkways at following locations:
a. Where indicated on Drawings.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 276
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 13
B. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Set walkway pads in cold-applied adhesive.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's representative to be on site daily and the entire time roofing work is being performed.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, roof membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect.
C. Perform the following tests:
a. Perform tests before overlying construction is placed. b. After testing, repair leaks, repeat tests, and make further repairs until roofing and flashing installations are watertight.
1) Cost of retesting is Contractor's responsibility.
c. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations of entrapped moisture, if any.
2. Low-Voltage Electrical Conductance Testing: Testing agency shall survey entire roof area and flashings to locate discontinuity in the roof membrane using an exposed metal electrical loop to create an electrical field tested with hand-held probes or a scanning platform having integral perimeter electrical loops creating a complete electrical field. a. Perform tests before overlying construction is placed. b. After testing, repair areas of discontinuities, repeat tests, and make further repairs until roofing and flashing installations are contiguous. 1) Cost of retesting is Contractor's responsibility.
c. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations of initial discontinuities, if any.
D. Test Cuts: Remove test specimens to evaluate problems observed during quality-assurance inspections of roofing system as follows:
1. Determine approximate quantities of components within roofing system according to ASTM D3617/D3617M.
2. Examine test specimens for interply voids according to ASTM D3617/D3617M and to comply with criteria established in Appendix 3 in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing."
3. Repair areas where test cuts were made according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Roofing Inspector: Contractor shall engage a qualified roofing inspector full-time on site to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare start up, interim, and final reports. Roofing Inspector's quality assurance inspections shall comply with criteria established in NRCA's "Quality Control and Quality-assurance Guidelines for the Application of Membrane Roofing Systems."
F. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation at commencement and upon completion.
1. Notify Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
G. Repair or remove and replace components of built-up roofing where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
1. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 277
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 14
H. A third party infra-red roof scan shall be completed at the completion of the job and 10 months after the completion in order to verify the integrity of the roof system.
3.12 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
1. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing components that do not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 278
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1
SECTION 07 6200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.
2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.
3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 279
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 2
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.
8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable.
10. Include details of special conditions.
11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factoryapplied finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.
2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved.
C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Evaluation Reports: For copings and roof edge flashing, from an agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction showing compliance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1.
E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 280
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 3
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Install sheet metal flashing and trim in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive products specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.
1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
2. Protect stored sheet metal flashing and trim from contact with water.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:
1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Recycled Content of Steel-Sheet Flashing and Trim: Postconsumer recycled content plus onehalf of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 281
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 4
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
F. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
G. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
H. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section when available.
1. Environmental product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface.
1. Finish: ASTM A480/A480M, No. 2D (dull, cold rolled).
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.
B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.
1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT, or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn.Ultra c. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.
d. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Specialty Tile & Metal Underlayment.
2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.
3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower.
C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 282
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 5
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
2. Fasteners for Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Solder:
1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factorymitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.
1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
c. Hickman Company, W. P.
d. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.
e. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc.
2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch thick.
3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 283
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 6
4. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials.
5. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends.
6. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.
7. Accessories:
a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge.
8. Finish: Mill.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
3. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
4. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified.
C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
F. Seams:
1. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 284
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 7
2. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long sections. Furnish with 6-inch-wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch-wide, exposed cover plate.
2. Fabricate with scuppers spaced 10 feet apart, to dimensions required with 4-inch-wide flanges and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof.
Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper.
a. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
B. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
C. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
F. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 285
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 8
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet Underlayment:
1. Install self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment; wrinkle free.
2. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
3. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures.
4. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses.
5. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller.
6. Roll laps and edges with roller.
7. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
B. Install slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Install in shingle fashion to shed water.
2. Lapp joints not less than 4 inches.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
3. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
4. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
5. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
6. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.
7. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
8. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 286
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 9
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pretinned surface would show in completed Work.
1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet.
2. Do not use torches for soldering.
3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.
Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering.
Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard.
1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes.
2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing:
1. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces in accordance with recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.
C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
1. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
2. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing.
3. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches.
4. Secure in waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36-inch centers unless otherwise indicated.
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric or butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 287
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 10
3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
B. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 288
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 1
SECTION 07 8413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 8443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The following publications govern the work of this Section and are hereby incorporated in the Contract Documents as if bound herein. The standards described apply generally unless specifically indicated otherwise in the text. They are identified below by their publishers and are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
1. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM E 84B91a Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E 814B88 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops ASTM C 1193B91 Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
2. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL-05B92 Fire Resistance Directory
UL 723B93 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials UL 1479B83 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
UL 2079 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 289
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 2
requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Approval according to FM Approval 4991, "Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 290
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 3
1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article.
Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." B. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.
1. Environmental Product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
F. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. Tremco, Inc.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 291
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 4
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50- cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.
2. Substrate primers.
3. Collars.
4. Steel sleeves.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 292
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 5
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.
2.4 MIXING
A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.
C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 293
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 6
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.
1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.
B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 294
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Latex joint sealants.
3. Acoustical joint sealants.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
D. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
E. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 295
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 2
4. Joint-sealant color.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Schedule: Include the following information for each joint sealant and substrate material to be tested:
1. Joint-sealant location and designation.
2. Manufacturer and product name.
3. Type of substrate material.
4. Proposed test.
5. Number of samples required.
D. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation are needed for adhesion.
E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.
F. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
G. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.
1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials.
3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with masonry substrates.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 296
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 3
4. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials.
5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
6. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.
7. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.
5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 297
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 4
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.
1. Environmental Product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
F. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
G. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
1. Sealant materials exposed to view shall match colors of adjacent surfaces. a. Provide custom colors to match Architect’s samples.
2. Provide custom-blended colors as needed for color matching as follows:
a. Sealant Joints in Masonry: Match mortar color
b. Joints in Cast Stone: Match color of matrix
c. Joints Around Doors, Windows, and Openings: Match color of adjacent wall material
d. Joints in Tile: Match grout color
e. Joints in Floors: Match control sample provided by Architect
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 298
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 5
3. Fully concealed joints:
a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full color range which has best overall performance characteristics required for application
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS, 311 NS, 890, or 890FTS.
c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil WS-290. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1 or Spectrem 800.
B. Silicone, S, NS, 50 NT: Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795.
b. Pecora Corporation; 864, 895 or 898.
c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil WS-295. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 or Spectrem 3.
2.3 SELF-LEVELING SILICONE TRAFFICJOINTS
A. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D 5893/D 5893M, Type SL; ASTM C 920, Type SL, Class 100/50, Use T; jet fuel resistant; gun-grade. a. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 900SL.
B. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D 5893/D 5893M, Type NS; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use T; gun-grade. a. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800.
2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.
B. STPE, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; MasterSeal NP 150.
b. Pecora Corporation; 898 NST.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.
2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR
c. Pecora Corporation; AIS 919
d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 299
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 6
2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Hilti CP605
c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. d. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
e. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
3. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
C. Sheet caulking for junction boxes:
1. “Lowry's Electrical Box Sealer”.
2. Tremco sheet caulking.
D. Sheet caulking for junction boxes at fire-rated assemblies:
1. “Firestop Putty Pads” by Hevi-duty/Nelson.
2. Specified Technologies, Inc.
3. HILTI CP-617.
E. Backing Rod: Closed-cell, neoprene rod or polyethylene foam.
F. Cementitious sealant:
1. Spray-applied (40 pcf) Monokote Z-146
G. Sprayed Acoustical Sealant:
1. STI “SpecSeal Smoke ‘N’ Sound Acoustical Spray”
2. Hilti CP672.
2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 300
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 7
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 301
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 8
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
4. Install all sealants free of contaminated substances, in a uniform, continuous smooth free application without air gaps or voids, regardless of abutting surface profiles. A high level of workmanship and finish is required, as determined by the Architect.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 302
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 9
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.
C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 303
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 10
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
3.8 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior and interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant:
a. Silicone S NS 100/50 NT.
b. Silicone, S, NS, 50 NT
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints at the interior of window perimeters.
1. Joint Sealant:
a. Silicone S NS 100/50 NT.
b. Silicone, S, NS, 50 NT
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant: Latex OP NF.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant: STPE, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, NT.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Sealant: Acoustical.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 304
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1
SECTION 08 1416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 8000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.
4. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.
5. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
6. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
7. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 305
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 2
1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing.
2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing thicknesses.
3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile.
4. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems.
5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment.
6. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
7. Clearances and undercuts.
8. Requirements for veneer matching.
9. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
E. Samples for Verification:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work.
2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required. c. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factoryfinished doors.
3. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified.
4. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For door inspector.
1. Fire-Rated Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 80, Section 5.2.3.1.
2. Egress Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4.
3. Submit copy of DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Special warranties.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 306
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 3
C. Fire-Rated Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality-control inspections of firerated door assemblies shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 80, Section 5.2.3.1.
D. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality-control inspections of egress door assemblies shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.
2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Masonite Architectural - ASSA ABLOY Group company, including Grahman and Maiman wood doors
2. Oregon Door
3. VT Industries Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 307
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 4
B. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.
1. Environmental Product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
D. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
E. Additional Low-emitting requirements –Thermal and Acoustic Insulation
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.
2. Methylene chloride and perchloroethylene shall not be intentionally added in insulation products.
F. Low-emitting requirements – Composite Wood:
1. Composite Wood Evaluation - Composite wood, as defined by the California Air Resources Board, Airborne Toxic Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products Regulation, shall be documented to have low formaldehyde emissions which meet the California Air Resources Board ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde resins.
G. Certified Wood: Wood shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.
H. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
I. Wood Veneers: All wood veneers for Project, for each species, despite trade, regardless of use, must be coordinated with the Contractor, and be purchased from the same vendor and flitch selection.
2.3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards and WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard.
B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extra Heavy Duty: Public toilets, janitor's closets, assembly spaces, exits and where indicated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 308
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 5
3. Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets) and private toilets and where indicated.
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.
2. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.
3. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
4. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.
E. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.
2.4 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.
2. Species: White Oak.
3. Cut: Rift Sawn.
4. Thickness: 1 ¾ inches.
5. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match.
6. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
7. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.
8. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridordoor faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or more.
9. Transom Match: Continuous match.
10. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood. a. Fire-Rated Single Doors: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed vertical edges.
b. Fire-Rated Pairs of Doors: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
11. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
12. Core for Fire-Rated Doors: As required to achieve fire-protection rating indicated on Drawings.
a. Blocking for Mineral-Core Doors: Provide composite blocking with improved screwholding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 309
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 6
13. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
14. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated.
2.5 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.
3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use.
B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard woodveneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.
D. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood louvers unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
E. Metal Louvers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Air Louvers, Inc.
b. Anemostat; a Mestek company.
c. L & L Louvers, Inc.
d. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
e. McGill Architectural Products.
2. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with Class II, clear anodic finish, AA-M12C22A31.
F. Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.
2. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory-installed raceway and wiring to accommodate specified hardware.
3. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 310
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 7
C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.
1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails.
Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames.
D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.7 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish or WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
4. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C. Install frames level, plumb, true, and straight.
1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. a. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1) For factory-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 311
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 8
3. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80.
4. Install smoke- and draft-control doors in accordance with NFPA 105.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish reports to Architect.
B. Inspections:
1. Fire-Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire-rated door in accordance with NFPA 80, Section 5.2.
2. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements in accordance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.
C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements.
E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated door assembly indicating compliance with each item listed in NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 312
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 1
SECTION 08 6250
TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes Tubular daylighting devices and accessories.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Data sheets showing roof dome assembly, flashing base, reflective tubes, diffuser assembly, and accessories.
4. Installation requirements.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
C. Shop Drawings: For skylights. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Indicate structural loadings and reactions to be transmitted to supporting curbs.
3. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture within the assembly to the exterior.
4. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assembly, showing the following:
a. Joinery including concealed welds.
b. Anchorage.
c. Expansion provisions.
d. Glazing.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 313
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 2
e. Flashing and drainage.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.
F. Fabrication Sample: Of each framing intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery including concealed welds.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
G. Electrical wiring diagrams and recommendations for power and control wiring.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in manufacture of tubular daylighting devices for minimum 20 years
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of metal-framed skylights required for this Project.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 314
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 3
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Daylighting Device: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years.
B. Electrical Parts: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 5 years, unless otherwise indicated.
C. LED Emitters, Drivers and Controls: Manufacturer’s standard warranty for 3 years against failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SolaMaster" Series, Model Number 750 DS, Closed Ceiling by Solatube International, or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Manufacturers not listed but who do offer products that comply with the requirements of this Section will be considered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Daylight Reflective Tubes: Spectralight Infinity with Cool Tube Technology combines ultra-high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance. Patented spectrally-selective optical surface yields an average total- and specular-reflectance greater than 99.5% percent for the Visible Light spectrum (400 nm to 700 nm) providing maximized visible light transmission and less than 25% reflectance for Infrared (IR) heat wavelengths (750 nm to 2500 nm) for minimized heat transmission, resulting in a spectrally-selective Total Solar Spectrum (250 nm to 2500 nm) reflectance less than 37 percent, as measured using a Perkin Elmer Lambda 1050 spectrophotometer with a Universal Reflectance Accessory. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance to ASTM E 308.
2.3 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
A. Tubular Daylighting Devices General: Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and selfflashing curb, reflective tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces; complying with ICC AC-16.
B. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 750 DS, 21 inch Daylighting System:
1. Model:
a. Solatube Model 750 DS-C Closed (Penetrating) Ceiling. AAMA Type TDDCC.
2. Capture Zone:
a. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube.
1) Outer Dome Glazing: Type DA, 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) minimum thickness injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material; UV inhibiting (100 percent UV C, 100 percent UV B and 98.5 percent UV A), impact modified acrylic blend.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 315
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 4
a) Raybender 3000: Variable prism optic molded into outer dome to capture low angle sunlight and limit high angle sunlight. b. Tube Ring: 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) nominal thickness injection molded ASA.
Prevents thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture. Attached to base of dome ring with butyl glazing rope 0.24 inch (6 mm) diameter; to minimize air infiltration.
c. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip, 0.63 inch (16 mm) tall by 0.28 inch (7 mm) wide.
3. Flashings:
a. Roof Flashing Base:
1) One Piece: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. Sheet steel, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A653/A653M or ASTM A463/A463M or ASTM A792/A792M, 0.028 inch (0.7 mm) plus or minus .006 inch (.015 mm) thick. a) Base Style: Type FC, Curb cap, with inside dimensions of 27 inches by 27 inches (685 mm by 685 mm) to cover curb as specified in Section 07600.
b. Curbs: Metal Insulated Roof Curb: Corrosion resistant 18 Gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653 G90 with continuous welded seams, integrated base plate for water tightness and extra strength, lined with 1-1/2 inch fiberglass fireproof sound attenuating thermal insulation, factory installed 2 by 2 treated wood nailer secured to top ledge of curb. Curb designed for single-ply roofing, lightweight fill, or tapered insulation low slope roof types. 1) C16 16 inch (406 mm) high Metal insulated curb
4. Transfer Zone:
a. Extension Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch (0.5 mm) conforming to ASTM B 209.
1) Reflective Tubes:
a) Reflective extension tube, Type EXX and Type EL with total length of run as indicated on the Drawings.
b) Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity with INFRAREDuction Technology combining ultra-high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance.
2) Tube Options
a) Extension Tube Angle Adapter: Provide manufacturer's standard adapters for applications requiring:
b) Type A2 two 0 to 90 degree extension tube angle adapters. c) Top Tube Angle Adapter, Type TA: Reflective 45 degree adjustable Top Tube Angle Adapter, 16 inches (406 mm) long.
d) Top Tube Angle Adapter and Bottom Tube Angle Adapter Kit: Type AK, Reflective 45 degree adjustable top and bottom angle adapters (one each), 16 inches (406 mm) long
e) Bottom Tube Angle Adapter, Type BA: Reflective 45 degree adjustable Bottom Tube Angle Adapter, 16 inches (406 mm) long. f) Reflective extension tube, Type EL: 48 inches (1220 mm) long, replaces two normal 24-inch (610 mm) extension tubes when long tube runs are required.
g) Spectralight Infinity SoftLight Extension Tube: Type ES, 24 inch (610 mm) Super-reflective extension tube with structured surface providing precise light spread for enhanced visual comfort. Replaces one standard 24 inch (610 mm) extension tube in the tube assembly. h) Thermal Insulation Panel: Type TIP, high-performance dual-glazed, thermally-broken tube insulation system.
i) Open ceiling trim ring: Type R, ABS Plastic, White; nominal thickness of 0.04 inch (1 mm).
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 316
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 5
j) Wire Suspension Kit: Type E, Use the wire suspension kit when additional bracing to the structure is required.
5. Delivery Zone:
a. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Solatube Model 750 DS-C.
Ceiling mounted box transitioning from round tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube; 23.8 inches by
23.8 inches (605 mm by 605 mm) square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings.
1) Metal Transition Box: Type TM, Metal Round to Square transition box comprised of Spectralight Infinity SoftLight material with structured finish on exposed reflective surface, .015 in (0.4 mm) thick. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance with ASTM E308.
6. Round Metal Housing: Type TRS, Round metal housing for suspended ceiling grids.
Comprised of white powder coated 26 gauge galvanized sheet steel, a Spectralight Infinity sleeve and a white powder coated 24 gauge steel ceiling mounting plate.
7. Round Metal Housing: Type TRH, Round metal housing for hard ceilings. Comprised of white powder coated 26 gauge galvanized sheet steel, a Spectralight Infinity sleeve and a white powder coated 24 gauge steel ceiling mounting plate. 1) Lens: Type L5 (Wide), OptiView Micro-replicated lens design to maximize light output and diffusion. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm) thick. Classified as CC2. b. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Solatube Model 750 DS-C.
Round ceiling mounted fixture transitioning round tubing to ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube; 21 inch (530 mm) round frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings. 1) Lens: Type L5 (Wide), Round OptiView Micro-replicated lens design to maximize light output and diffusion. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm) thick. Classified as CC2.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon.
B. Provide custom trim as indicated on drawings.
C. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling system requirement.
D. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 317
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 6
B. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit and wiring.
C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Coordinate installation with substrates, air and vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that finished installation is weather tight.
1. Install flashing to produce weatherproof seal with curb and overlap with roofing system termination at top of curb.
2. Provide thermal isolation when components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in rough opening to maintain continuity of thermal barriers.
3. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier material.
C. Where metal surfaces of tubular unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including preservative-treated wood, provide permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer
D. Align device free of warp or twist, maintain dimensional tolerances.
E. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test in presence of Owner, Architect, or Contractor, or their designated representative. Correct if needed before proceeding with installation of subsequent units.
F. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each fixture to verify operation, control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 318
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 1
SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass products.
2. Laminated glass.
3. Glass with decorative film overlay.
4. Glazing sealants.
5. Glazing tapes.
6. Miscellaneous glazing materials.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 8300 "Mirrors."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.
C. IBC: International Building Code.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances to achieve proper safety margins for glazing retention under each design load case, load case combination, and service condition.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
1. Submit System U-Value for each condition, with each glass type
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 319
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 2
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines and have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit scaled shop drawings showing layout, jointing, achoring sizes and types, shapes, thickness, and other detailed information needed to fully describe fabrication and installation
2. Shop drawing submittal package shall be coordinated with submission of related portions of Work.
D. Test Reports:
1. Stress and thermal analysis of glass
2. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant, and other glazing materials.
E. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.
1. Coated glass.
2. Laminated glass.
3. Each decorative film overlay on type of decorative glass.
F. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets sealants and colored spacers, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.
G. Glazing and Sealant Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
H. Delegated Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
I. Submit calculations specific to glass sizes and thickness and heat treatments that glass will meet design load requirements for this building
1. Perform and submit thermal stress analysis for each glass type and size at each building elevation taking into account shading effects. Append to thermal stress analysis a
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 320
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 3
statement from glass manufacturer that based upon this analysis that resulting thermal stresses will not reduce specified statistical probability of breakage
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for coated glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.
1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.
C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
D. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install glazing in mockups specified in other Division 8 sections to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 321
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 4
B. All tempered Glazing units and glazing units larger than 50 square feet shall be 100% heat soak tested per EN 14179-2016 in calibrated oven.
1. Records must be kept of heat soaking for each batch for QA/QC purposes and made available to the Architect on request. Such records shall include, as a minimum, the following:
a. Traceability of glass, i.e. source of supply and evidence of batching. b. Dates of tempering/heat soaking.
c. Certification that the glass will meet the performance requirements of this Specification.
d. Records to include details of all units that failed during the heat soak test.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Heat-Soaked Tempered Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace heat-soaked tempered glass units that spontaneously break due to nickel sulfide (NiS) inclusions at a rate exceeding 0.3 percent (3/1000) within specified warranty period. Coverage for any other cause is excluded.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 322
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing.
C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.
1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.
4. Thermal Loads: Design glazing to resist thermal stress breakage induced by differential temperature conditions and limited air circulation within individual glass lites.
D. Safety Glazing: Provide safety glazing where required by code that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
F. Sound Rating: Provide sound control assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested as sound-retardant units by an acoustical testing agency, and have the following minimum rating:
1. STC Rating: As indicated on Drawings as calculated by ASTM E 413 when tested in an operable condition according to ASTM E 90
G. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
H. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.
1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least equal to the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
2. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Glass Panes
a. Glass: 3.5 kg CO2eq per kg/ 1.6 kg CO2eq per lb.
3. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.
4. Declared Units: 1 kilogram or 1 pound.
5. Product Category Rules:
a. NSF International PCR for GANA Flat Glass, v.1, 2014-03-31
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 323
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 6
6. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
I. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
J. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass products by Vitro Architectural Glass or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Guardian Industries Corp.
2. Pilkington North America.
3. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.
4. Viracon, Inc.
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glass shall conform to ASTM C1048 and ASTM C1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I – glazing select, and the following:
1. Glass edges shall be clean scored and cut.
2. Glass shall conform to the requirements of the Consumer Product Safety Commission's Standard 16 CFR 1201, the Safety Certification Council, ANSI Z97.1-1975, and local codes, whichever is most stringent. Notify Engineer if safety glazing is required.
B. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
C. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and calculations. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
D. Low Emissivity Coated Float Glass
1. Complying with ASTM C1376, coated by vacuum deposition (sputter-coating) process, and complying with other requirements specified in this Section
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 324
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 7
E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. NGA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
G. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm.
H. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heatstrengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heatstrengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.
I. Glass and glazing, in combination with adjacent construction, shall provide a fully weathertight system that promptly drains all incidental water to the exterior. Glass and glazing materials shall not block weeps or otherwise impede drainage. All glazing pockets shall drain incidental water at the sill of each lite of glass; internal drainage of the glazing pockets at vertical mullions is not acceptable.
2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
B. Ultraclear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class I (clear), Quality-Q3; and with visible light transmission of not less than 91 percent and SHGC of not less than 0.87.
1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ultraclear glass products by Vitro Architectural Glass Starphire or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite.
b. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite.
C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
D. Heat treated float glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated, of kind and condition indicated. All heat strengthening and tempering shall be by the horizontal process, with IG units fabricated in such a manner as to have all roller distortion in a horizontal direction as installed in the building.
1. The minimum surface and edge compression shall comply with requirements of ASTM C 1048.
2. Requirements of ASTM C 1048 listed for 6mm HS glass shall also apply for greater thicknesses.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 325
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 8
3. Fully Tempered glass shall conform to ANSI Z97.1.
4. Fully tempered glass shall be 100% heat soak tested per EN 14179-2016 in calibrated oven.
a. Unless otherwise specified, all fully tempered glass shall be heat soaked to minimize the occurrence of nickel sulfide (NiS) crystals. This process shall be strictly controlled and carried out to EN 14179 paying particular attention to the temperature and duration of treatment.
b. Records must be kept of heat soaking for each batch for QA/QC purposes and made available to the Architect on request. Such records shall include, as a minimum, the following:
1) Traceability of glass, i.e. source of supply and evidence of batching. 2) Dates of tempering/heat soaking.
3) Certification that the glass will meet the performance requirements of this Specification.
4) Records to include details of all units that failed during the heat soak test. c. Responsibility for NIS Inclusions:
1) Where glass is heat soak tested, the Contractor is to indemnify the Client in the event of more than 5 lite per 1000 of fully tempered glass.
E. Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 3; Quality-Q6, Finish F2 (patterned both sides), Pattern P3 (random).
F. Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 3; Quality-Q6, Finish F2 (patterned both sides), Pattern P3 (random).
G. Reflective- and Low-E-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C1376.
H. Reflective- and Low-E-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C1376, Kind CS.
I. Decorative Film Overlay: Translucent, dimensionally stable, polyester film, film, 2-mil-minimum thickness, with pressure-sensitive, clear adhesive back for adhering to glass and releasable protective backing.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 3M FASARA films, Glace finish or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Manufacturers not listed but who do offer products that comply with the requirements of this Section will be considered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range to match color of spandrel panels.
2.5 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.
1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer, ionomeric polymer interlayer or cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.
3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 326
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 9
2.6 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING
A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.
B. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat glass; 5/16-inch total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite Plus.
b. Schott North America, Inc.; Laminated Pyran Crystal. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L.
C. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple plies of uncoated, clear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. InterEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; Pyrobel. b. Pilkington Group Limited (distributed by Technical Glass Products); PyroStop. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Contraflam N2 or SGG Swissflam N2.
2.7 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene EPDM silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
2.8 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 327
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 10
a. Dow Corning Corporation; DOWSIL 795.
b. Pecora Corporation; 896.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze.
d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600.
C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
2.9 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks:
1. Silicone with Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.
D. Spacers:
1. Neoprene blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.
E. Edge Blocks:
1. Silicone with Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fireprotection rating indicated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 328
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 11
2.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
C. Decorative Film Overlay: Apply squarely aligned to glass edges, uniformly smooth, and free from tears, air bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, in pattern indicated on Drawings to the back face of clean glass, according to manufacturer's written instructions, including surface preparation and application temperature limitations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 329
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 12
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 330
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 13
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 331
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 14
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
3.9 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type: Clear float glass.
1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.
2. Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes and as specified on drawings.
3. Provide safety glazing labeling.
B. Glass Type: Clear float glass with decorative film overlay.
1. Glass Type: Clear, float glass.
2. Glass Thickness: 6.0 mm.
3. Use: Suitable for interior applications.
4. Pattern: Match Architect's samples.
5. Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes and as specified on drawings.
3.10 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE
1. B. Glass Type: Clear laminated glass with decorative plastic interlayer.
1. Kind LA, consisting of two lites of 3.0 mm annealed float glass.
2. Total Thickness: ¼ inch.
a. Outer Lite: 1/8" clear Glass
b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch, but not less than that required to comply as a Type II safety glass material.
1) Provide decorative color film, match Architect’s sample c. Indoor Lite: 1/8" clear Glass
3. Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes and as specified on drawings.
4. Provide safety glazing labeling.
C. Glass Type: Clear laminated acoustic glass.
1. Kind LA, consisting of two lites of 6.0 mm annealed float glass.
2. Outer Lite: 1/4" clear Glass
3. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch, but not less than that required to comply as a Type II safety glass material.
4. Indoor Lite: 3/8" clear Glass
5. STC: 40 minimum.
6. Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes and as specified on drawings.
7. Provide decorative film overlay where indicated.
8. Provide safety glazing labeling.
3.11 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type: Low-E-coated, clear insulating laminated glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Outdoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of annealed float glass. a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3 mm.
b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch (0.76 mm).
3. Interspace Content: Air.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 332
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 8000 - 15
4. Indoor Lite: Clear glass:
a. Minimum Thickness of Indoor Lite: 6 mm.
5. Low-E Coating: Second surface.
6. Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes and as specified on drawings.
3.12 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES
A. Glass Type: 45-minute fire-rated glazing; laminated ceramic glazing.
1. Provide safety glazing labeling.
B. Glass Type: 45-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise limitation; laminated glass with intumescent interlayers.
1. Provide safety glazing labeling.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 333
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 1
SECTION 09 2216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.
3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 4000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines and have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.
B. Evaluation Reports: For embossed steel studs and tracks, firestop tracks, post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 334
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel Framing Industry Association, or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Notify manufacturer of damaged materials received prior to installation.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
C. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling as required by AISI S202, "Code of Standard Practice for ColdFormed Steel Structural Framing." PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 10 lbf/sq. ft. (480 Pa).
D. Design framing systems in accordance with AISI S220, "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Nonstructural Members," unless otherwise indicated.
E. Design Loads: As indicated on architectural Drawings or 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa) minimum as required by the IBC.
F. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
G. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
H. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section when available.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 335
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 3
1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least equal to the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
2. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Steel
a. Light-gauge metal framing – 3.0 kg CO2eq per kg/ 1.4 kg CO2eq per lb.
3. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.
4. Declared Units: 1 kilogram or 1 pound.
5. Product Category Rules:
a. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Thin walled profiles and profiled panels of metal, v.1.0/1.7/1.0, 2019-01-08
b. International EPD System PCR for Basic iron or steel products & special steels, except construction products, v.2.0, 2020-03-27.
c. UL Environment PCR for Designated Steel Construction Products, v.2.0, 2020-12-
31. 6. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
2. ClarkDietrich Building Systems
3. MarinoWARE.
4. MBA Building Supplies
5. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
C. Framing Members, General: Comply with AISI S220 and ASTM C645, for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with AISI S220 and ASTM C645, requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated
2. Protective Coating: Comply with ASTM C645; ASTM A653/A653M, G40 (Z120); or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance. Galvannealed products are unacceptable. a. Coating demonstrates equivalent corrosion resistance with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Studs and Runners: AISI S220 and ASTM C645. Use either steel studs and runners or embossed steel studs and runners.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally equivalent to conventional ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:
1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to tracks while allowing 2-inch minimum vertical movement.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 336
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 4
2. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
3. Double-Track System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
4. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
F. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
G. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
H. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inchminimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.
I. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
J. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
K. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoatedsteel thickness of 0.0329 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.
L. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 AC193 AC58 or AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.
a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 337
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 5
b. Type: Torque-controlled, expansion anchor torque-controlled, adhesive anchor or adhesive anchor.
c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. d. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated:
Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.
D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, in size indicated on Drawings.
E. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0190 inch.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
c. United States Gypsum Company.
2.4 ISOLATORS
A. Resilient Sway Bracing:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Mason Industries types “DNSB” and “WIC” (714-630-0701), b. Kinetics Noise Control types “PSB” and “Unibrace” (614-889-0480) B. Isolators for Resilient Ceilings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Heavy Duty
1) Mason Industries “30N”
2) Kinetics Noise Control “Gotham.” (ICC)
b. Light Duty:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 338
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 6
1) Mason Industries “WHR”
2) Kinetics “AF”.
C. Neoprene Partition Supports:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Mason Industries “NPS.”
D. Damping compound: Provide visco-elastic vibration damping compound in liquid form for spray application. Damping compound shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, water-based emulsion suitable for covering metal surfaces.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Soundcoat Company GP-1, Irvine, CA (949-955-9202)
b. Blachford, Inc. Aquaplas DL-10, Chicago, IL (630-231-8300) c. Kinetics Noise Control KDC-E-162, Dublin, OH (614-889-0480) d. Silent Running SR500 (203-469-1337)
e. Pyrotek Noise Control Sound Paint SP150 (509-991-8548).
E. Steel Deck Insert: One piece fire retardant plug for steel deck flutes:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. J-M “Deck Plug Fire Stop”.
F. Partition Isolation Pad and Anchor Isolator:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Kinetics Model Wallmat
1) Model Wallmat is 1/2-inch (13-mm) thick and designed to carry continuous loads up to 25-psi (17-N/cm2) without excessive creep or pad failure.
G. Sound Isolation Clips:
1. Sound isolation clips specified shall be designed and manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control, Dublin, Ohio. Product shall be Model Iso-Max Sound Isolation Clips.
2. Vertical Load capacity. Clips shall have sufficient capacity to support wall or ceiling weights as constructed. In a vertical load test comparible to a ceiling installation, the clip shall have a minimum design load capacity of 36 lbs. using 25 gauge furring channel.
The minimum design load capacity when using 22 gauge furring channel shall be 48 lbs.
Design Load capacity shall be based on a safety factor where the load to failure, defined as pullout of the channel from the clip, is a minimum 2.5 times the allowable maximum Design Load. Anchors for attachment of the clips to the substructure shall be selected to support wall and/or ceiling weights at each clip.
3. The isolation clips shall consist of a rubber element into which a standard galvanized steel furring channel, 7/8 in. x minimum 25 gauge, is captured. The channel legs snap fit into the rubber element without any metal-to-metal or other rigid contact with building elements.
4. The isolation clip is attached to the wall/ceiling framing or other structural substrate through galvanized steel brackets on each side of the rubber isolation element. The brackets shall be of sufficient strength to carry the wall or ceiling weight without bending or failure.
H. Provide engineering and inspection services for all resilient ceiling and wall isolator installations.
An engineer retained by the manufacturer is responsible to provide detailed design of isolator installations in compliance with loading criteria defined by the project’s structural engineer.
Submit spacing of isolators for each wall and ceiling condition.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 339
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 7
I. Furnish and install ceiling and wall isolators at all rooms having concrete floating floors and where indicated.
J. Size isolators to comply with load and deflection requirements.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inchthick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 incheso.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fireresistive materials from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation.
2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.
3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 340
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 8
4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.
B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 341
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 9
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 incheso.c.
F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inchfrom the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 342
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 10
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G. Isolation clips: Spacing and location of sound isolation clips shall be determined by the manufacturer based on wall or ceiling type. Installation drawing details shall be provided by the manufacturer to assure optimum sound control and structural integrity of the system.
H. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 343
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 1
SECTION 09 2900
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Tile backing panels.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
2. Section 09 3000 "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
5. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for ceilings, walls, acoustical and thermal insulation, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
6. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines and have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Samples: For the following products:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 344
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 2
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. Sound-Rated Assemblies: For Sound-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Environmental Certification: Provide materials carrying certification by one of the following:
1. Greenguard Gold Certification
D. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 345
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 3
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
E. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.
1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least equal to the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
2. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Finishes
a. Gypsum Board – 4500 kg CO2eq per 1000 m2/420 kgCO2 eq 1,000 per ft2
3. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.
4. Declared Units: 1 square meter or 1 square foot.
5. Product Category Rules:
a. ASTM International PCR for North American Glass Mat Gypsum Panels, v.1, 2016-08-01.
b. NSF International PCR for PCR for Gypsum Panel Products, v.1, 2019-07-17
6. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
F. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
G. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:
1. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
H. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
I. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Products:
a. United States Gypsum Company, LLC, “USG Sheetrock® Brand EcoSmart Panels Firecode® X”.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 346
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 4
b. Certainteed Type X Gypsum Board.
B. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.
1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement Underlayment or BackerBoard. b. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.
c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc or Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.
C. Custom Trim Components: Edge trim system for transitions between drywall and suspended ceilings. Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel,
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 347
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 5
1. Basis of Design: Armstrong Axiom.
a. Provide trim as indicated on drawings.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.
2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Sound-Absorptive Fabric Layer: Black Soundex sheet membrane shop applied to backs of panels. Non-woven fabric with Class 1 fire rating. Perforated panels with absorbing material to achieve an NRC of 0.70-0.80 minimum.
1. Products:
a. Owens Corning – SelectSound Black Acoustical Board
b. MBI Products – Blackout Theater Board
c. Thermafiber – SoundZero
d. Armstrong BioAcoustic Infill panel.
e. Knauf Black Acoustical Board.
E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 348
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 6
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
F. Thermal and Acoustic Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation." G. Moldable putty for application to electrical boxes and other penetrations of acoustical barriers.
1. Pre-formed 1/8-inch pads
2. Non-toxic, asbestos-free
3. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer:
a. Quiet Putty QP-380 by Quiet Solution; 1250 Elko Dr.; Sunnyvale, CA 94089; 800/797-8159
b. Outlet Box Pads by Harry A. Lowry & Associates, 11176 Penrose St., Sun Valley, CA 91352, 818/768-4661
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 349
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 7
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Sound-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
2. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.
3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
4. Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistancerated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 350
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 8
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.
D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
E. Curved Surfaces:
1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch-long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.
2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c.
Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.
B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
5. U-Bead: Use where indicated.
6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 351
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 9
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
1. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
3. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration.
4. For Level 1 gypsum board finish, embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistancerated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 352
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TILING 09 3000 - 1
SECTION 09 3000
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Porcelain tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
3. Crack isolation membrane
4. Metal edge strips.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.
2. Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 353
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TILING 09 3000 - 2
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for ceilings, walls, acoustical and thermal insulation, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
5. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification:
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work.
3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
D. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 354
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TILING 09 3000 - 3
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association.
2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification.
3. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers.
4. Installer employs at least one installer for Project that has completed the Advanced Certification for Tile Installers (ACT) certification for installation of gauged porcelain tile/gauged porcelain tile panels and slabs and large format tile.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer.
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 355
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TILING 09 3000 - 4
1. Crack isolation membrane.
2. Joint sealants.
3. Metal edge strips.
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
F. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
G. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.
1. Environmental Product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
H. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
I. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:
1. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
J. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
K. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 356
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TILING 09 3000 - 5
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Tile Type: .
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on finish legend.
2. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Tile Trim Units
1. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight, module size to match adjacent tile size.
b. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size to match adjacent tile.
c. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile. d. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining flat tile.
e. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.
2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
B. Corrugated Polyethylene: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 3/16-inch nominal thickness.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Schluter Systems L.P.; DITRA.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Medium-Bed, Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Custom Building Products or comparable product by one of the following:
a. ARDEX Americas.
b. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
c. MAPEI Corporation.
2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 357
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TILING 09 3000 - 6
B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide TEC® Power Grout®, or comparable product by one of the following:
a. ARDEX Americas.
b. Custom Building Products
c. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
d. MAPEI Corporation.
2. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Temporary Protective Coating: Product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic, designed; white zinc alloy or stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Schluter Systems LP or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Blanke Corporation.
b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.
D. Edge protecting metal trim for protecting outside corners:
1. Basis of Design: Schluter Jolly
2. Material: Color coated aluminum.
3. Size: as selected by Architect from full range.
4. Color: as selected by Architect from full range.
E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 358
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TILING 09 3000 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.
B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
C. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 359
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TILING 09 3000 - 8
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
2. Where adjoining tiles on base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.
3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
F. Joint Widths: As narrow as tile will allow, but in no case wider than ¼ inch.
G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls.
B. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 360
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TILING 09 3000 - 9
3.8 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Walls, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:
1. W244: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment. a. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar.
b. Grout: High-performance grout.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 361
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 1
SECTION 09 5113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.
B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
5. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines and have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied finishes.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 362
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 2
E. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:
1. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems.
1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension-system members.
2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.
4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.
5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Diffusers.
c. Grilles.
d. Speakers.
e. Sprinklers.
f. Access panels.
g. Perimeter moldings.
7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to acoustical panels.
8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES.
E. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 363
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 3
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems.
B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 364
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 4
E. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
F. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.
1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least equal to the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:
2. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Finishes
a. Ceiling Panels – 30 kg CO2eq per m2/ 2.8 kgCO2 eq per ft2
3. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.
4. Declared Units: 1 square meter or 1 square foot.
5. Product Category Rules: Non-metal ceilings
a. Guidance for Building Related Products and Services, From the range of Environmental Product Declarations of UL Environment: “Part B: Non-Metal Ceiling Panel EPD Requirements”, October 2015v1. North American LCA Environmental Impact Results
b. UL Environment PCR for Part B: Non-Metal Ceiling Panels, v.1, 2015-10-16 c. PCR Guidance for Building-Related Products and Services Part A: Life Cycle Assessment Calculation Rules and Report Requirements. Version 3.2. UL Environment. September 2018 PCR Guidance for Building-Related Products and Services Part B: Flooring EPD Requirements. Version 2. UL Environment.
September 2018.
d. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Mineral panels, v.1.0/1.6/1.1, 2018-12-10
6. Product Category Rules: Metal ceilings
a. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Metal Ceilings, v.1.0/1.7/1.0, 2019-01-08
7. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
G. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
H. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
I. Additional Low-emitting requirements –Thermal and Acoustic Insulation
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.
2. Methylene chloride and perchloroethylene shall not be intentionally added in insulation products.
J. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 365
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 5
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
C. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.
E. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Optima #3251 PB
B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:
1. Type and Form: Type XII, glass-fiber base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, cloth. 1 Pattern: E (lightly textured)
C. Color: White.
D. LR: 0.95
E. NRC: 0.90
F. AC: 190
G. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members.
H. Thickness: 1 inch
I. Modular Size: 12 by 60 inches.
2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Where indicated, provide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" according to ASTM C 635/C 635M.
B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 366
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 6
C. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel or aluminum.
5. Cap Finish: Painted in color as selected from manufacturer's full range.
D. Custom Trim Components: Edge trim system for transitions between drywall and suspended ceilings. Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel,
1. Basis of Design: Armstrong Axiom.
a. Provide trim as indicated on drawings.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled bonded anchors.
b. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316.
B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.
C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
D. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.
E. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical panels in place during a seismic event.
F. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.
G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.
2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. CertainTeed Corp.
3. Fry Reglet Corporation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 367
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 7
4. Gordon, Inc.
5. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.
2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.
C. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements.
1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
2. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Hilti CP605
c. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.
2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 368
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 8
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M, seismic design requirements, and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.
11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 369
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 9
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.
3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.
6. Install seismic clips in areas indicated; space according to panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
7. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts according to requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated assembly.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.
B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 370
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 1
SECTION 09 6513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient molding accessories.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
5. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.
D. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 371
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
B. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.
1. Environmental Product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
D. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 372
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 3
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Flooring:
1. FloorScore Compliance: Hard Surface flooring and Adhesives shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.
F. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on the drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Nora systems Inc.
2. Roppe Corporation USA
3. Tarkett Johnsonite
2.3 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861 Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or ASTM F 1861 Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
1. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered).
2. Style and Location:
a. Style A, Straight: In areas with carpet.
b. Style B, Cove: In areas with resilient flooring.
B. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
C. Height: 4 inches.
D. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
E. Outside Corners: Job formed.
F. Inside Corners: Job formed.
G. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.4 MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Description:
1. Cap for cove carpet.
2. Cap for cove resilient flooring.
3. Carpet bar for tackless installations.
4. Carpet edge for glue-down applications.
5. Nosing for carpet.
6. Nosing for resilient flooring.
7. Reducer strip for resilient flooring.
8. Joiner for tile and carpet.
9. Transition strips.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 373
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 4
B. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
C. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated.
D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
1. All adhesives will be required to carry Cradle to Cradle Silver certification score or higher, including the following:
a. truRenew Carpet Flooring Adhesive SP by WF Taylor
b. Shaw 5100 Adhesive
c. XL Brands flooring adhesives
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish, nominal 2 inches wide, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 374
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 5
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 375
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 1
SECTION 09 6515
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rubber Sheet Flooring.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 09 6513 “Resilient Base and Accessories” for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Product Data: Laboratory tests for flooring products, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
5. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: provide the following information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings: For each type of resilient floor.
1. Include sheet flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
2. Show details of special patterns.
D. Samples:
1. Full-size units of each color, texture, and pattern of sheet flooring required.
2. For each exposed product and for each color, texture, and pattern specified, in manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections.
3. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color required.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 376
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 2
E. Product Schedule: For flooring. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for flooring installation and seaming method indicated.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 60 deg F or more than 80deg F, in spaces to receive flooring during the following periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 72 hours after installation.
B. The ambient relative humidity is recommended to be 50% RH ± 10%; however, dew point must be avoided.
C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 377
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 3
E. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B. Slip Resistance: Provide products identical to those tested for slip resistance per ASTM D 2047 with a static coefficient of friction not less than 0.6 for level surfaces and 0.8 for ramped surfaces.
C. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
D. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.
1. Environmental Product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
E. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
F. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
G. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Flooring:
1. FloorScore Compliance: Hard Surface flooring and Adhesives shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.
2. Sustainable Product Certification: Gold level certification according to ANSI/NSF 140.
H. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.2 RUBBER SHEET FLOORING
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johnsonite Rubber Flooring.
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1859.
1. Type: Type I, homogeneous rubber sheet floor covering.
2. Thickness: 0.12 inch.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 378
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 4
3. Hardness: Shore type “A”, 92, measured using Shore, Type A durometer per ASTM D 2240.
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
E. Seamless-Installation Method: Heat welded.
F. Colors and Patterns:
1. RF-01: VN5 The blues
2. RF-02: 84 blue jeans
3. RF-03: 58 Windsor blue
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit flooring and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams. a. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to contrast with flooring.
D. Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials.
E. Provide threshold of thickness and width as shown on the drawings.
F. Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings, of equal gauge to the flooring, homogeneous rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Architect from standard colors available.
G. Provide metal edge strips of width shown on the drawings and of required thickness to protect exposed edges of the flooring. Provide units of maximum available length to minimize the number of joints. Use butt-type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage, or overlap-type metal edge strips for exposed anchorage. Unless otherwise shown, provide strips made of extruded aluminum with a mill finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of flooring.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 379
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 5
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install flooring until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient flooring.
3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.
B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.
2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 380
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 6
G. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I. Seamless Installation:
1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to fuse sections permanently into a seamless flooring installation. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting flooring.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover flooring until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 381
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 1
SECTION 09 8430
SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes shop-fabricated, acoustical panel units tested for acoustical performance, including the following:
1. Sound-absorbing wall panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
4. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
5. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 382
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 2
2. Include details at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge profile and core materials.
3. Include details at cutouts and penetrations for other work.
D. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Panel Edge: 12-inch-long Sample(s) showing each edge profile, corner, and finish.
2. Core Material: 12-inch-square Sample at corner.
3. Mounting Devices: Full-size Samples.
4. Assembled Panels: Approximately 36 by 36 inches, including joints and mounting methods.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats.
2. Items penetrating or covered by units including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Alarms.
e. Sprinklers.
f. Access panels.
3. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to units.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of unit.
C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of unit to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Mounting Devices: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than five devices, including unopened adhesives.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 383
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 3
1. Build mockup of typical wall area 48 inches wide by full height. Include intersection of wall and ceiling, corners, and perimeters.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with unit manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.
B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation.
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wetwork in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Lighting: Do not install units until a lighting level of not less than 50 fc is provided on surfaces to receive the units.
C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect units from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.
D. Field Measurements: Verify unit locations and actual dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate them on Shop Drawings.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace units and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Acoustical performance.
b. Warping of core.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall units specified in this Section from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Units shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 384
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 4
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or NFPA 286.
B. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.
1. Environmental Product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products
1. General Emissions Evaluation: Interior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.
E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:
1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
F. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and preconsumer recycled content.
2. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
2.3 SOUND ABSORBING FELT PLANKS SM-02
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Filzfelt ARO Plank
1.3. B. Content: 100% Wool Design Felt + Acoustic Substrate indicated by manufacturer.
C. Plank Thickness: As indicated on drawings
D. Plank Widths: As indicated on drawings
E. Pattern: ARO Plank 1.3
F. Repeat Width: As indicated on drawings
2.4 SOUND ABSORBING FELT PANELS SM-03
A. Basis of Design: Provide Akustika 10 Wall panels by Filzfelt or a comparable product by one of the following:
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 385
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 5
1. Manufacturers not listed but who do offer products that comply with the requirements of this Section will be considered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures.
B. Wall mounted acoustic system.
C. Content: 100% Wool Design Felt + Acoustic Substrate
D. Panel Thickness: 5 mm minimum.
E. NRC: 0.60
F. Edge: Wrapped
G. Mounting: Z-Clips
H. Color and finish: as selected by Architect from full range.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Core Materials: Manufacturer's standard.
1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612; of type standard with manufacturer; nominal density of 6 to 7 lb/cu. ft., unfaced, and dimensionally stable, molded rigid board; and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
2. Tackable, Impact-Resistant, High-Density Board for Face Layer: 1/8-inch-thick layer of compressed molded glass-fiber board with a nominal density of 16 to 18 lb/cu. ft. laminated to face of core.
B. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of unit, recommended by manufacturer to support weight of unit, and as follows:
1. Metal Clips or Bar Hangers: Manufacturer's standard two-part metal "Z" clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of unit and the other part to substrate, designed to permit unit removal.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's standard construction unless otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage.
B. Edge Hardening: For glass-fiber board and mineral-fiber board cores, chemically harden core edges and areas of core where mounting devices are attached.
C. Core-Face Layer: Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, or sags.
D. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following:
1. Thickness.
2. Edge straightness.
3. Overall length and width.
4. Squareness from corner to corner.
5. Chords, radii, and diameters.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 386
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install units with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.
B. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/32 inch wide.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.
B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 387
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 1
SECTION 09 9123
INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
2. Product Data: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 388
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 2
3. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
E. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 389
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 3
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. PPG Architectural Coatings.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section
1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.
2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.
D. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.
1. Environmental Product Declarations:
2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).
E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:
1. Show compliance with VOC limits as detailed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
F. Sustainability Requirements:
1. Provide products manufactured and extracted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.
G. Colors: Match Architect's samples.
1. Twenty five percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 390
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 4
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Wood: 15 percent.
2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 391
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 5
G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 392
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 6
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
h. Other items as directed by Architect.
3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.